738562
12
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/688
Next page
V90
C R O S S C O U N T R Y
OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas-
sengers. Volvo strives to be one of the safest cars in the world. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read
the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual.
The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and
on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other
cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or
medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way.
2
OWNER INFORMATION
Owner information
16
Owner's manual in centre display
17
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
18
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
20
Volvo Cars support site
20
Reading the owner's manual
21
The owner's manual and the environment
23
YOUR VOLVO
Volvo ID
26
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
26
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
28
IntelliSafe-driver support
31
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
32
Software updates
35
Recording data
35
Terms & Conditions for Services
36
Customer Privacy Policy
36
Important information on accessories
and auxiliary equipment
37
Installation of accessories
37
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket
38
Showing the car's identification number
39
Driver distraction
39
SAFETY
Safety
42
Safety during pregnancy
42
Whiplash Protection System
43
Pedestrian Protection System
44
Seatbelts
45
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
46
Seatbelt tensioner
47
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
48
Door and seatbelt reminder
48
Airbags
50
Driver airbags
50
Passenger airbag
51
Activating and deactivating passen-
ger airbag*
53
Side airbags
55
Airbags
56
Safety mode
56
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
57
Child safety
58
Child seats
59
Upper mounting points for child seats
59
Lower mounting points for child seats
60
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
61
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
Child seat positioning
61
Child seat mounting
63
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
65
Table for location of i-Size child seats
67
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
68
Integrated child seat*
71
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
72
Folding down the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
73
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
Instruments and controls in left-hand
drive car
76
Instruments and controls in right-
hand drive car
77
Driver display
79
Driver display settings
83
Fuel gauge
84
Trip computer
84
Show trip data in the driver display
86
Resetting the trip meter
87
Show trip statistics in the centre display
87
Settings for trip statistics
88
Time and date
89
Outside temperature gauge
89
Indicator symbols in the driver display
90
Warning symbols in the driver display
92
License agreement for the driver display
93
Application menu in driver display
99
Handling the application menu in the
driver display
100
Messages in the driver display
101
Managing messages in the driver display
102
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
103
Overview of centre display
105
Managing the centre display
108
Activating and deactivating centre display
111
Navigating in the centre display's views
111
Managing tiles in centre display
115
Function view in centre display
118
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
120
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
120
Keyboard in centre display
122
Changing keyboard language in cen-
tre display
125
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre display
125
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
127
Switching off and changing the vol-
ume of the system sound in the cen-
tre display
127
Changing system units
128
Changing system language
128
Opening settings in the centre display
128
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
129
Changing settings in the centre display
130
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
130
Resetting settings in the centre display
131
Setting types in the centre display
131
4
Table showing centre display settings
132
Driver profiles
133
Selecting driver profile
134
Renaming a driver profile
135
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
135
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
135
Message in centre display
136
Managing messages in the centre display
137
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
138
Head-up display*
138
Activating and deactivating the head-
up display*
140
Settings for head-up display*
140
Voice recognition
141
Using voice recognition
142
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
143
Voice control of radio and media
144
Settings for voice recognition
144
LIGHTING
Lighting control
148
Adjusting light functions via the cen-
tre display
149
Adjusting headlamp level
150
Position lamps
151
Daytime running lights
151
Dipped beam
152
Using main beam
153
Active main beam
153
Using direction indicators
155
Active bending lights*
156
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
156
Rear fog lamp
157
Brake lights
158
Emergency brake lights
158
Hazard warning flashers
158
Using home safe lighting
159
Approach light duration
159
Interior lighting
160
Adjusting interior lighting
162
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
Windows, glass and mirrors
164
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
164
Reset sequence for pinch protection
165
Power windows
165
Operating power windows
166
Using the sun blind*
167
Rearview and door mirrors
168
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
168
Angling the door mirrors
169
Panorama roof*
171
Operating the panorama roof*
172
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
174
Using windscreen wipers
175
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles*
176
Using the rain sensor
176
Using the rain sensor's memory function
177
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
178
Using the rear window wiper and washer
179
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
180
5
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
Manual front seat
182
Power front seat*
183
Adjusting the power front seat*
183
Storing memory function in power
operated front seat*
184
Using stored memory in a powered
front seat
185
Massage settings in the front seat*
185
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
186
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
187
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
187
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
188
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
189
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
190
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
192
Steering wheel controls and horn
193
Steering lock
194
Adjusting the steering wheel
194
CLIMATE
Climate
198
Climate zones
198
Climate control - sensors
199
Perceived temperature
199
Controlling climate control with voice
recognition
200
Air quality
201
Clean Zone*
201
Clean Zone Interior Package*
202
Interior Air Quality System*
202
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
203
Passenger compartment filter
203
Air distribution
204
Changing air distribution
204
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
205
Table of air distribution options
207
Climate controls
210
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
212
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated front seat*
213
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
213
Activating and deactivating ventilated
front seat*
214
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
215
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated steering wheel*
215
Activating auto climate control
216
Activating and deactivating air recir-
culation
216
Activating and deactivating time set-
ting for air recirculation
217
Activating and deactivating max defroster
217
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
219
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of heated windscreen*
220
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door mirrors
220
Activating and deactivating automatic
starting of the heated rear window
and door mirrors
221
Regulating fan level for front seat
221
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
222
Regulating temperature for front seat
223
Regulating temperature for rear seat*
223
Synchronising temperature
224
Activating and deactivating air condi-
tioning
225
Parking climate*
226
Preconditioning*
226
6
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
227
Preconditioning time setting*
228
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
228
Activating and deactivating time set-
ting for preconditioning*
229
Removing time setting for precondi-
tioning*
230
Climate comfort when parking*
231
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
231
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
232
Heater*
233
Parking heater*
234
Additional heater*
235
Activating and deactivating automatic
start of auxiliary heater
235
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
Lock confirmation
238
Lock indication setting
239
Remote control key
239
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
241
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
243
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
243
Remote control key range
244
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
245
Ordering more remote control keys
248
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
248
Red Key settings*
249
Detachable key blade
250
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
251
Immobiliser
252
Type approval for the remote control
key system
254
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
263
Keyless locking and unlocking*
264
Settings for Keyless entry*
265
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
265
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
266
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
267
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
268
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
269
Automatic locking when driving
270
Opening and closing the power*-
operated tailgate
270
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
273
Opening and closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
274
Private locking
275
Activating and deactivating private
locking
275
Alarm*
277
Activating and deactivating alarms*
278
Reduced alarm level*
279
Double lock*
280
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
280
Detection of unknown car component*
281
7
DRIVER SUPPORT
Driving support systems
284
Speed-dependent steering force
284
Stability system Roll Stability Control
285
Electronic stability control
286
Sport mode for electronic stability control
287
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
287
Limitation for sport mode in Elec-
tronic Stability Control
288
Symbols and messages for elec-
tronic stability control
289
Speed Limiter
290
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
291
Managing speed for the Speed Limiter
291
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set
it in standby mode
292
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
293
Deactivating the Speed Limiter
293
Limitations for Speed Limiter
294
Automatic Speed Limiter
294
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed
Limiter
296
Changing the tolerance for the Auto-
matic Speed Limiter
297
Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter
297
Cruise Control
298
Activating and starting Cruise Control
299
Managing speed for the Cruise Control
300
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
301
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
301
Deactivating Cruise Control
302
Distance Warning*
303
Head-up display for Distance Warning
303
Activating/deactivating Distance Warning
304
Setting the time interval for Distance
Warning
304
Limitations of Distance Warning
305
Adaptive Cruise Control*
306
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision
risk warning
309
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise
Control if there is a risk of collision
309
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
310
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
311
Setting time interval for Adaptive
Cruise Control
312
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
313
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
315
Starting overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
315
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with Adaptive Cruise Control
315
Changing target with Adaptive
Cruise Control
316
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
316
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control
317
Change between Cruise Control and
Adaptive Cruise Control
318
Symbols and messages for Adaptive
Cruise Control
320
Pilot Assist
322
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
325
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if
there is a risk of collision
326
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
327
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
328
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
329
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
330
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
332
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
332
Limitations for overtaking assistance
with Pilot Assist
333
Change the target with Pilot Assist
333
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
334
8
Limitations of Pilot Assist
334
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
336
Radar unit
337
Limitations for radar device
338
Recommended radar device mainte-
nance
341
Type approval for radar device
342
Camera unit
346
Limitations for camera unit
347
Recommended camera device main-
tenance
350
City Safety
350
Parameters and subfunctions for City
Safety
351
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
353
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
354
City Safety in cross traffic
356
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
357
City Safety when evasive manoeu-
vres are prevented
357
Limitations of City Safety
358
Messages for City Safety
361
Rear Collision Warning
362
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
362
BLIS*
363
Activate/deactivate BLIS
364
Limitations of BLIS
365
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
365
Messages for BLIS
367
Cross Traffic Alert*
368
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
369
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
369
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
370
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
371
Road Sign Information*
372
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
373
Road Sign Information and sign display
373
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
375
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
375
Activating/deactivating Speed warn-
ing in Road Sign Information
376
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
377
Limitations of Road Sign Information
377
Driver Alert Control
378
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
379
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning with Driver Alert
Control
380
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
380
Lane assistance
380
Steering assistance with lane assistance
382
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
383
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
383
Limitations of Lane assistance
383
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
385
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
387
Steering assistance at risk of collision
388
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision risk
388
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
389
Steering assistance level in the event
of a run-off risk
389
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off risk
390
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
390
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
391
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a risk of a
head-on collision
392
9
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
392
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
393
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance on risk of rear-end collision*
394
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of rear-end collision
394
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
396
Park Assist*
397
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
398
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
399
Limitations of Parking assistance
399
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
400
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
401
Park assist camera*
402
Parking cameras' camera views
403
Park assist lines for parking camera
405
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
407
Starting the park assist camera
407
Limitations for park assist camera
408
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
409
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
410
Park Assist Pilot*
411
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
411
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
412
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
415
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
416
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
417
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
418
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the car
420
Switching off the car
421
Ignition positions
422
Selecting ignition mode
423
Alcohol lock*
424
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
424
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
425
Brake functions
425
Foot brake
425
Brake assistance
426
Braking on wet roads
427
Braking on gritted roads
427
Brake system maintenance
427
Parking brake
428
Activating and deactivating the park-
ing brake
428
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
430
Parking on a hill
430
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
430
Automatic braking when stationary
431
Activating and deactivating the auto-
matic brake at a standstill
432
Help when starting on a hill
432
10
Auto braking after a collision
433
Gearbox
433
Manual gearbox
434
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
435
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
436
Gear selector inhibitor
438
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
438
Kick-down function
439
Gear shift indicator*
439
All-wheel drive
441
Drive modes*
441
Changing drive mode*
443
Drive mode ECO
444
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
446
Start/Stop function
446
Driving with start/stop function
446
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
448
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
448
Level control* and shock absorption
451
Settings for level control*
453
Low speed control
453
Activating and deactivating low-
speed driving using a function button
454
Hill descent control
454
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control with the function button
455
Economical driving
456
Preparations for a long trip
457
Winter driving
457
Driving in water
458
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
459
Filling fuel
459
Handling of fuel
460
Petrol
461
Petrol particle filter
462
Diesel
462
Empty tank and diesel engine
463
Diesel particulate filter
464
Emission control with AdBlue®
465
Handling AdBlue®
465
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
466
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
468
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
470
Overloading the starter battery
471
Using jump starting with another battery
471
Towbar*
472
Specifications for towbar*
473
Extendable and retractable towbar*
474
Driving with a trailer
476
Trailer stability assist*
477
Checking trailer lamps
478
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
479
Towing
480
Fitting and removing the towing eye
481
Recovery
483
HomeLink
®
*
484
Programming HomeLink
®
*
484
Using HomeLink
486
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
487
Compass
487
Activating and deactivating the compass
488
Calibrating the compass
488
11
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
Sound, media and Internet
492
Audio settings
492
Apps
493
Downloading apps
494
Updating apps
495
Deleting apps
496
Radio
496
Start radio
497
Changing radio band and radio station
497
Searching for radio stations
498
Setting radio favourites
499
Settings for radio
499
RDS radio
501
Digital radio*
501
Link between FM and digital radio*
502
Media player
502
Media playback
503
Controlling and changing media
504
Searching media
505
Gracenote
®
506
CD player*
507
Video
507
Playing a video
507
Playing back DivX
®
508
Settings for video
508
Media via Bluetooth
®
508
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
509
Media via USB port
509
Connecting a device via USB port
509
TV*
510
Using the TV*
510
Settings for TV*
511
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
511
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
512
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
513
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
514
Android Auto*
515
Using Android Auto*
515
Settings for Android Auto*
516
Tips for using Android Auto*
517
Phone
517
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
518
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
520
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
520
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone
521
Switch between Bluetooth-con-
nected phones
521
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
522
Managing phone calls
522
Managing text messages
523
Settings for text messages
524
Managing the phone book
524
Settings for phone
525
Settings for Bluetooth devices
526
Internet-connected car*
526
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Bluetooth)
527
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)
528
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
528
Settings for car modem
529
Sharing Internet access from the car
via a Wi-Fi hotspot
530
No or poor Internet connection
531
Remove Wi-Fi network
531
Wi-Fi technologies and security
532
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
532
Activating and deactivating data sharing
532
Compatible media formats
533
12
Technical specifications for USB devices
534
Storage space on hard disk
534
License agreement for audio and media
535
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
546
Dimension designation for tyre
547
Dimension designation for wheel rim
548
Tyres' rotation direction
549
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
549
Checking tyre pressure
550
Adjusting tyre pressure
550
Recommended tyre pressure
551
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
552
Calibrate the system for tyre pres-
sure monitoring*
553
See tyre pressure statue in the cen-
tre display*
555
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
556
When changing wheels
557
Tool kit
557
Jack*
557
Wheel bolts
558
Removing a wheel
559
Fitting the wheels
561
Spare wheel*
562
Taking out the spare wheel
563
Winter wheels
563
Snow chains
564
Emergency puncture repair kit
565
Using a puncture repair kit
566
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
569
13
LOADING, STORAGE AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Passenger compartment interior
572
Tunnel console
573
Electrical sockets
574
Using electrical sockets
576
Using the glovebox
577
Sun visors
579
Cargo area
579
Recommendations for loading
579
Roof load and loading on load carriers
580
Bag hooks
581
Load retaining eyelets
581
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
582
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
582
Operating cargo cover*
583
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
584
Fitting and removing the safety net*
586
First aid kit
587
Warning triangle
587
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
590
Data transfer between car and work-
shop via Wi-Fi
590
Download Center
591
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
591
Car status
592
Book service and repair
592
Sending car information to a workshop
594
Raise the car
595
Opening and closing the bonnet
597
Servicing the climate control system
598
Head-up display when replacing the
windscreen*
599
Engine compartment overview
599
Engine oil
600
Checking and filling with engine oil
601
Topping up coolant
602
Bulb replacement
604
Removing the plastic cover for bulb
replacement
605
Exterior lamp positions
605
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
606
Replacing the main beam lamp
607
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
607
Replacing the front direction indica-
tor bulb
608
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
609
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
610
Bulb specifications
610
Starter battery
611
Support battery
614
Symbols on the batteries
615
Fuses and central electrical units
616
Replacing a fuse
617
Fuses in engine compartment
618
Fuses under glovebox
621
Fuses in cargo area
624
Cleaning the interior
628
Cleaning the centre display
628
Cleaning the head up display*
629
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
630
Cleaning the seatbelts
630
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
630
Cleaning leather upholstery
631
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
632
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
632
Cleaning the exterior
633
Polishing and waxing
633
14
Handwashing
634
Automatic car wash
635
High-pressure washing
636
Cleaning the wiper blades
636
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
637
Cleaning wheel rims
638
Rustproofing
638
Car paintwork
639
Touching up minor paintwork damage
639
Colour codes
641
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
641
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
642
Wiper blades in service position
643
Filling washer fluid
644
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
648
Dimensions
651
Weights
653
Towing capacity and towball load
654
Engine specifications
656
Engine oil — specifications
657
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
659
Coolant — specifications
660
Transmission fluid — specifications
660
Brake fluid — specifications
660
Fuel tank - volume
661
Tank capacity for AdBlue
®
661
Air conditioning — specifications
661
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
663
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
665
Lowest permitted tyre load index and
speed rating for tyres
666
Approved tyre pressures
667
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index 669
OWNER INFORMATION
OWNER INFORMATION
16
Owner information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen-
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a
supplement to the owner's manual available in
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor-
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's centre display
1
In the centre display, drag down
the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual navi-
gation with exterior and interior
images of the car. The informa-
tion is searchable and is also
divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car. Available in the app are
video tutorials and options for
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi-
gate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual
1
in the glove-
box that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo retailer to
order.
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
mendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
1
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
OWNER INFORMATION
}}
17
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner information is not
compliant with national or local laws and reg-
ulations. Do not switch to a language that is
difficult to understand as this may make it dif-
ficult to find your way back in the structure on
screen.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
Owner's manual in centre display
A digital
2
version of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual can be accessed from
the top view, and in some cases the contextual
owner's manual can also be accessed from the
top view.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
Owner's manual
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the top
view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's
manual.
The information in the owner's manual can be
accessed directly via the owner's manual home-
page or its top menu.
Contextual owner's manual
The contextual owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
When the contextual owner's manual is available,
it is shown to the right of
Owner's manual in
the top view.
Pressing the contextual owner's manual opens
an article in the owner's manual that is related to
the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
press Navigation Manual - an article that is
related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
possible, for example, to access app-specific arti-
cles.
2
Applies for most markets.
||
OWNER INFORMATION
18
Related information
Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre
display (p. 18)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Navigate in the owner's manual in
the centre display
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display top view in the car. The
content is searchable and it is easy to navigate
between different sections.
The owner's manual is accessed from the top view.
To open the owner's manual - drag down the
top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the owner's manual. The options
can be accessed from the owner's manual home-
page and from the top menu.
Opening the menu in the top menu
Press in the upper list in the owner's
manual.
> A menu containing various options for
finding information opens:
Homepage
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcate-
gories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
categories in order to be found
more easily.
1.
Press
Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
Tap on a main category (
).
>
A list of subcategories (
) and articles
(
) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it.
To go back, press the back arrow.
OWNER INFORMATION
19
Quick Guide
Press the symbol to access a
page with links to a selection of
articles that can be particularly
useful to read in order to get to
know the most common func-
tions of the car. The articles
can also be accessed via cate-
gories, but are collected here for quick access.
Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with hot-
spots that lead to articles about
those parts of the car.
1.
Press
Exterior or Interior.
> Exterior or interior images are shown with
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
3. Tap on the title to open the article.
To go back, press the back arrow.
Favourites
Press the symbol to access the
articles saved as favourites. Tap
on an article in order to read it
in its entirety.
Saving or deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing at the
top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
again in the current article.
Video
Press the symbol to view brief
instruction videos for various
functions in the car.
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car as well as other
useful information.
Using the search function in the top
menu
1.
Tap on in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3. Tap on the article or category to access it.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 122)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
OWNER INFORMATION
* Option/accessory.
20
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app
3
from both the App Store and Google Play.
The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
in the owner's manual and the content is search-
able.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
Related information
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as web-
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-
by-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to cus-
tomer support and your nearest Volvo retailer.
3
For certain mobile devices.
OWNER INFORMATION
}}
* Option/accessory.
21
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
ments and warranties, amongst other things.
Here there is also information about accessories
and software adapted for your car model.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
tions and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
ual.
The intention of this owner's information is to
explain all of the possible features, functions and
options included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not
intended as an indication or guarantee that all of
these features, functions and options are
included in every vehicle. Some terminology used
may not exactly match terminology used in sales,
marketing and advertising materials.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help
will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk: *.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
||
OWNER INFORMATION
22
Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot-
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of impor-
tance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
OWNER INFORMATION
23
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer-
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual:
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
bered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instruc-
tions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the relative order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
Coolant
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
taining closely associated information.
Images
Illustrations used in the owner's manual are
sometimes schematic and are intended to pro-
vide an overall picture or example of a certain
function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
appearance depending on equipment level and
market.
To be continued
}}
This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
||
This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20)
Volvo Cars support site (p. 20)
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi-
nating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
®
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC
®
-certified forests or
other controlled sources.
Related information
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
YOUR VOLVO
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
26
Volvo ID
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
sonalized Volvo services
1
online.
It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car,
volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app
2
. Certain
functions and services require that the car is reg-
istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
services available directly from the car.
Examples of services:
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
to the car.
Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
ferred workshop/retailer at volvocars.com to
be able to book service directly from the car.
Advantages of Volvo ID
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
changed automatically for other services.
Related information
Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26)
Book service and repair (p. 592)
Creating and registering a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must
also be registered to the car to enable use of the
various Volvo ID services.
Create a Volvo ID with the app
1.
Download the Volvo ID app from
Download
Centre in the centre display's app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website
1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in
3
using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo
ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
1
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
2
If you have Volvo On Call*.
3
Available in certain markets.
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
27
Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call
app
4
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol-
lows:
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from
Download Centre in the app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Related information
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
4
Cars with Volvo On Call*.
YOUR VOLVO
28
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val-
ues and influences all operations. The environ-
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy-
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
sumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ-
ment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment -
here is some advice:
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph)
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to
increased energy consumption.
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and main-
tenance of the car.
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
Use preconditioning* before starting in cold
conditions - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine
reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which decreases consumption and
reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom-
passes a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica-
ble standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen enter-
ing the passenger compartment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger com-
partment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
edge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a retailer for refer-
ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
||
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
30
Related information
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 663)
Economical driving (p. 456)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 227)
The owner's manual and the environment
(p. 23)
Air quality (p. 201)
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
31
IntelliSafe-driver support
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car
safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of sys-
tems, both standard and optional, whose pur-
pose is to make a car journey safe, to prevent
injuries and to protect passengers and other
road users.
Support
IntelliSafe includes driver support functions such
as Adaptive cruise control* which helps the driver
to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-
selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Pilot Assist
5
helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's edge markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver to park in or
leave a parking space.
Other examples of systems that can help the
driver are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic
Alert (CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
systems.
Prevention
City Safety is a function that can contribute to
preventing accidents. The function can prevent or
mitigate a collision with pedestrians, cyclists,
larger animals or vehicles. Visual, acoustic and
brake pulse warnings are given in the event of a
risk of collision to help the driver act in time. If the
driver does not react to the warning and the risk
of collision is assessed as imminent then City
Safety can automatically brake the car.
Lane assistance (LKA) is another example of a
function that can help prevent accidents by help-
ing the driver - on motorways and similar larger
roads - to reduce the risk of the car accidentally
leaving its own lane.
The function Steering aid during increased
collision risk can help the driver reduce the risk
of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or
colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by
actively steering the car back into its lane and/or
swerving.
Protection
With the aim of protecting the driver and passen-
gers, the car is equipped with seatbelt tensioners
which can tension the seatbelts in critical situa-
tions and in collisions. The car also has airbags
and inflatable curtains, as well as Whiplash
Protection System (WHIPS), which protects
against whiplash injuries.
A Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is also
available for mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car in the event of a frontal collision.
Related information
Driving support systems (p. 284)
Active main beam (p. 153)
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Airbags (p. 50)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 44)
5
This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market.
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
32
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use different types of apps and make the car a
Wi-Fi hotspot.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online
connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.
Information when it is needed, where it
is needed
The different displays in the car provide informa-
tion at the right time. The information is shown in
different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
YOUR VOLVO
}}
* Option/accessory.
33
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information may, for example, include
traffic warnings, speed information and naviga-
tion* information. Road Sign Information and
incoming phone calls are also shown in the head-
up display. The display is operated via the right-
hand steering wheel keypad and via the centre
display.
Driver display
12-inch* driver display.
||
YOUR VOLVO
* Option/accessory.
34
8-inch driver display.
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two steer-
ing wheel keypads.
Centre display
Many of the main functions of the car are con-
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini-
mal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the driver
needing to take his/her hands
off the steering wheel. The sys-
tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Driver display (p. 79)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530)
YOUR VOLVO
}}
35
Software updates
So that you as a Volvo customer get the best
experience of your car, Volvo continuously devel-
ops the systems in the cars and the services that
you are offered.
You can update the software in your Volvo to the
latest version when your car is serviced at an
authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software
update gives you access to new functions and
improvements, as well as previous improvements
included with previous software updates.
For more information about released updates and
answers to frequently asked questions, please go
to support.volvocars.com.
NOTE
Functionality after updating may vary depend-
ing on market, model, model year and options.
Related information
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 32)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis-
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
How the various systems in the car worked
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo-
graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit-
uation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis-
tered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
cle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
tion can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of contin-
uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
YOUR VOLVO
36
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties with-
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
managed and that its management complies with
relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
tion - contact a Volvo retailer.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo offers services so that you can drive your
Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible.
These services include everything from assis-
tance in emergencies to navigation and various
maintenance services.
Before using the services, it is important for you
to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36)
Customer Privacy Policy
Volvo respects and safeguards the personal
integrity of everyone visiting our website.
This policy regards to the handling of customer
data and personal information. The purpose is to
give current, past and potential customers a gen-
eral understanding of:
The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
The types of personal data we gather.
The reason we gather your personal data.
How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 532)
Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36)
Recording data (p. 35)
YOUR VOLVO
}}
37
Important information on
accessories and auxiliary
equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories and extra equipment can negatively
affect the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associ-
ated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
Options or accessories described in this manual
are marked with an asterisk. In the event of
uncertainty over what is standard or an option/
accessory, contact a Volvo retailer.
WARNING
The driver always bears the ultimate responsi-
bility that the car is used safely and that laws
and regulations in force are followed.
It is also important that the car has mainte-
nance and service according to Volvo's rec-
ommendations, the owner's information and
the service and warranty booklet.
If the on-board information differs from the
printed owner's manual then the printed infor-
mation always has precedence.
Related information
Installation of accessories (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the car's diag-
nostic socket (p. 38)
Reading the owner's manual (p. 21)
Installation of accessories
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cians. Certain accessories only function when
associated software is installed in the car's com-
puter system.
Volvo original accessories are tested to
ensure that they function with the car sys-
tems for performance, safety and emissions
control. In addition, a trained and qualified
Volvo service technician knows where acces-
sories may or may not be safely installed in
your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a
trained and qualified Volvo service technician
before installing any accessories in or on
your car.
Accessories that are not approved by Volvo
may not have been specifically tested for use
with your car.
Some of the car's performance or safety sys-
tems can be negatively affected if you install
accessories that have not been tested by
Volvo, or if you permit someone without
experience of the car to install accessories.
Damage that is caused by accessories instal-
led in a non-approved or incorrect way is not
covered by any new car warranty. More war-
ranty information can be found in the service
and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept
||
YOUR VOLVO
38
any liability for deaths, personal injury or
costs arising as a result of the installation of
non-original accessories.
Related information
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
Connection of equipment to the
car's diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of software
or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on
the car's electronic system.
We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only
install Volvo approved original accessories, and
that installation of accessories is only carried out
by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians.
Certain accessories only function when associ-
ated software is installed in the car's computer
system.
Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is
under the instrument panel on the driver's side.
NOTE
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse-
quences if unauthorised equipment is con-
nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cians.
Related information
Important information on accessories and
auxiliary equipment (p. 37)
YOUR VOLVO
39
Showing the car's identification
number
When contacting a Volvo retailer concerning
your Volvo On Call subscription, for example,
you will need the car's identification number
(VIN
6
).
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Continue to
System System
Information
Vehicle Identification
Number
.
> The car's identification number is shown.
Driver distraction
The driver is responsible for doing everything
possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their
passengers and other road users. Part of this
responsibility is avoiding distractions such as
carrying out an activity that is not related to oper-
ating the car in a driving environment.
Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with con-
tent-rich entertainment and communications sys-
tems. This could be mobile phones with hands-
free, navigation systems and audio systems with
lots of functions. You may also have other porta-
ble electronic devices for your own convenience.
Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the
driving experience. If they are used in the wrong
way they could distract you.
We wish to give the following warnings regarding
such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for
your safety. Never use a device or function in the
car in such a way that it will distract you from the
task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to
serious accidents. Apart from these general
warnings, we offer the following advice regarding
the new functions that may be in the car:
WARNING
Never use a hand-held mobile phone
while driving. In some areas it is forbidden
for the driver to use a mobile phone while
the car is moving.
If the car is equipped with a navigation
system you must only set and change the
itinerary when the car is parked.
Never program the audio system while
the car is moving. Program the radio's
presets when the car is parked and then
use the programmed presets for faster
and simpler use of the radio.
Never use laptops or hand-held comput-
ers while the car is moving.
Related information
Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
6
Vehicle Identification Number
SAFETY
SAFETY
42
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys-
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's
driver and passengers in the event of an acci-
dent.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate
different safety systems, such as different types
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, roll-over or driving off the
road, the systems react in different ways to pro-
vide the best protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also
constructed so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
Warning symbol in driver display
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's elec-
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is
fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
is switched on during driving and the mes-
sage
SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems
does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
should be contacted as soon as possible.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the car's various safety
systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
contacted.
If the specific warning symbol is broken
then the general warning symbol is illu-
minated instead and the driver display
shows the same message.
Related information
Safety during pregnancy (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Airbags (p. 50)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Pedestrian Protection System (p. 44)
Safety mode (p. 56)
Child safety (p. 58)
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
43
cle as they drive (which means that they must be
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer-
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the
seat with as large a distance as possible between
abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists
of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion,
as well as a specially designed head restraint in
the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
rest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then
any load must be secured to prevent it from
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the
event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
44
Seating position
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's func-
tion is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
Pedestrian Protection System
The Pedestrian Protection System (PPS) is a
system which, in certain frontal collisions, con-
tributes to mitigating a pedestrian's impact with
the car.
In certain frontal collisions with a pedestrian, the
sensors in the front of the car react and the sys-
tem is activated.
When PPS is activated, the following occur:
The rear section of the bonnet is raised.
An automatic alarm is sent via Volvo On Call*.
The sensors are active at a speed of approx.
25-50 km/h (15-30 mph).
The sensors are designed to detect a collision
with an object that has similar properties to those
of the human leg.
NOTE
There may be objects in the traffic environ-
ment that prompt a signal to the sensors that
is similar to a collision with a pedestrian. It is
possible that the system will be activated in
the event of a collision with such an object.
WARNING
Do not fit any accessories or change anything
in the front. Incorrect intervention at the front
may cause incorrect function in the system
and lead to serious injury and damage to the
car.
Volvo recommends that genuine wiper arms
are used and that only genuine parts are used
for them.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the system yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted. Defective
work in the system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
WARNING
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop in the event of any damage to
the front of the car in order to ensure that the
system is intact.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
PPS has been activated, or a fault
has occurred in the system. Follow
the recommendation given.
SAFETY
45
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelts
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
SAFETY
46
Putting on and taking off seatbelts
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Putting on seatbelts
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Press together the seat mounting and move
the seatbelt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against your throat.
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
47
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
Taking off seatbelts
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tension-
ers and electric seatbelt tensioners that can ten-
sion the seatbelts in critical situations and colli-
sions.
Standard seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard
seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in
the event of a collision with sufficient force in
order to more effectively restrain the occupant.
Electric seatbelt tensioner
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support sys-
tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid-
ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten-
sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the
occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
When the critical situation has come to an end,
the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten-
sioner are restored automatically, but they can
also be restored manually.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
(p. 48)
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 53)
SAFETY
48
City Safety (p. 350)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
Resetting the electric seatbelt
tensioner
The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be
reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner
can be reset manually if the belt remains
extended.
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
sioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
Driver display graphics
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
sengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
SAFETY
49
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis-
play.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
either of them is not wearing one.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
minates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's warning symbol illumi-
nates.
Related information
Seatbelts (p. 45)
Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 46)
SAFETY
50
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable
curtains for driver and passengers.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are
deployed.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following
is recommended:
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Driver airbags (p. 50)
Passenger airbag (p. 51)
Side airbags (p. 55)
Airbags (p. 56)
Driver airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is
equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee
airbag
1
on the driver's side.
Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag
1
on the driver's
side in the front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
driver as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
SAFETY
}}
51
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Steering wheel airbag location
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag
1
location
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
Related information
Airbags (p. 50)
Passenger airbag (p. 51)
Passenger airbag
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
equipped with an airbag on the passenger side
in the front seat.
Front passenger airbag in front seat.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps
to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the
passenger as well as the knees and legs.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions
the initial collision impact for the occupant. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car.
This is completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
52
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Passenger airbag location
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Related information
Airbags (p. 50)
Driver airbags (p. 50)
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 53)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
53
Activating and deactivating
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-
ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
Activating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
||
SAFETY
54
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
The passenger airbag must always be acti-
vated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Deactivating passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the passenger seat when
the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
SAFETY
55
Related information
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47)
Child seats (p. 59)
Side airbags
The side airbags on the driver's and passenger
seats act to protect the chest and hips in the
event of a collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
frames of the front seats and help to protect the
driver and passengers in the front seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbags and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
Airbags (p. 50)
SAFETY
56
Airbags
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
ing a collision.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine
parts that are approved for fitting within these
areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
Airbags (p. 50)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
gered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning sym-
bol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order.
This message means that the car has reduced
functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example.
SAFETY
}}
57
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that engaging an author-
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after
Safety mode See
Owner's manual has been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Starting and moving the car after safety
mode (p. 57)
Recovery (p. 483)
Starting and moving the car after
safety mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode
1. Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
2. Switch off the car.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems
check and then try to resume normal sta-
tus.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still shown on the display the car
must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
den damage may make the car impossible to
control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1. If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
||
SAFETY
58
Related information
Safety mode (p. 56)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Recovery (p. 483)
Child safety
Children must always sit secure while travelling
in the car.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and
attachment devices) which is designed for fitting
in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety
equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for
a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the
child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to
use.
The equipment that should be used is selected
taking account of the weight and size of the child.
Volvo recommends that children travel in a rear-
facing child seat until as late an age as possible,
at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a
front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4
feet 7 inches) tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Related information
Safety (p. 42)
Child seats (p. 59)
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 269)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
59
Child seats
Suitable child seats should always be used
when children are travelling in the car.
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted
and used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
Related information
Child safety (p. 58)
Integrated child seat* (p. 71)
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 59)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Activating and deactivating passenger air-
bag* (p. 53)
Upper mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
60
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom-
mendations from the child seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Related information
Child seats (p. 59)
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 60)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
Child seats (p. 59)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
SAFETY
}}
61
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for
child seats
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
2
mount-
ing points for child seats in the rear seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
2
on
the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
Child seats (p. 59)
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59)
Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 60)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
Child seat positioning
It is important to position the child seat in the
right place in the car and this depends, amongst
other things, on the type of child seat and
whether the passenger airbag is activated.
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
senger seat.
2
Names and symbols change depending on market.
||
SAFETY
62
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
Child seats (p. 59)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
SAFETY
}}
63
Child seat mounting
It is important to remember a number of things
when a child seat is mounted and used, which
depend on where the child seat is positioned.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
NOTE
When using child safety equipment, it is
important to read the installation instructions
included.
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety equipment, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat loose in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
Installation in the front seat
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
When fitting front-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is activated.
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console
3
accessory.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these
3
.
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
Installation in the rear seat
WARNING
Child seats with support legs must not be
mounted in the centre seat, risk of danger.
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-
Size
4
.
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
3
The accessory range varies depending on market.
4
Varies depending on market.
||
SAFETY
64
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
65
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 0+
max 13 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 1
9-18 kg
L
C
UF
A, D
U, L
C
U
Group 2
15-25 kg
L
C
UF
A
U
E, F
, B*
, G
, L
C
U
E
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
66
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 3
22-36 kg
X
UF
A
U
F, H
, B*
, G
U
H
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E
Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type
approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
F
Volvo recommends: Römer KidFix XP (type approval E1 04301312).
G
Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04220).
H
Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 67)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
Seatbelts (p. 45)
SAFETY
67
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R129.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-
ing child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats X X
i-U
A
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 68)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
SAFETY
68
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the owner's manual section on
installing a child seat before installing one in
the car.
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C
, X
D
X
IL
C
X
Group 0+
max 13 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C, E
, X
D
X
IL
C
XC Rear-facing child seat
D Rear-facing child seat
SAFETY
}}
69
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
A Front-facing child seat
X
IL
B, E, F
, X
D
IL
F
, IUF
F
XB Front-facing child seat
B1 Front-facing child seat
C Rear-facing child seat
IL
B, E
, X
D
X
IL
G
X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not interfere with the child seat.
F
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
G
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be included
on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo dealer for information about which i-
Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
||
SAFETY
70
Related information
Child seat positioning (p. 61)
Child seat mounting (p. 63)
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 65)
Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 67)
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats
(p. 61)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
71
Integrated child seat*
The integrated child seats on the outer positions
in the rear seat allow children to sit comfortably
and safely.
The child seat is specially designed to provide
children with good safety, together with the car's
seatbelt. The seat cushion can be raised in two
positions depending on the weight of the child.
The child seat is approved for children who weigh
15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and are at least 95 cm (37
inches) tall.
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on
the shoulder.
Check before driving that:
the seat cushion is raised to the correct posi-
tion for the weight of the child
the seat cushion in locked in position
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
the seatbelt does not lie across the child's
throat or below the shoulder
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned
low over the pelvis to provide optimal protec-
tion.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement
of the integrated child seat is only performed
by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not
make any modifications or additions to the
child seat. If an integrated child seat has been
subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection
with a collision, then the seat cushion, seat-
belt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat,
must be replaced. Even if the child seat
appears to be undamaged, it may not afford
the same level of protection. This also applies
if the seat cushion was in lowered position
during a collision or similar. The seat cushion
must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
Related information
Child seats (p. 59)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated
child seat* (p. 72)
Folding down the seat cushion in the inte-
grated child seat* (p. 73)
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
72
Folding up the seat cushion in the
integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should always be folded up
when the integrated child seat is in use.
The seat cushion can be folded up in two posi-
tions. The position that should be used depends
on the weight of the child.
Lower position Upper position
Weight 22-36 kg
(50-80 lbs)
15-25 kg
(33-55 lbs)
Lower position:
Pull the handle forwards and upwards to
release the seat cushion.
Press the seat cushion backwards to lock.
Upper position, start from the lower position:
Press the button to release the seat cushion.
Lift the seat cushion up at the front edge
and press it back against the backrest to
lock.
WARNING
If the instructions for the integrated child seat
are not followed then the child could sustain
serious injury in the event of an accident.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
and then folded up to the lower position.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
73
Related information
Integrated child seat* (p. 71)
Folding down the seat cushion in the inte-
grated child seat* (p. 73)
Folding down the seat cushion in
the integrated child seat*
The seat cushion should be folded down into
the rear seat when the integrated child seat is
not being used.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the seat cushion
from the upper position to the lower position.
From the upper position, the seat cushion
must first be fully lowered into the rear seat,
and then folded up to the lower position.
Pull the handle forwards to release the seat
cushion.
Press down with your hand in the centre of
the seat cushion in order to lock it.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the child
seat's seat cushion before lowering.
NOTE
Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child
seat's seat cushion must be lowered first.
Related information
Integrated child seat* (p. 71)
Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated
child seat* (p. 72)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
76
Instruments and controls in left-
hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indica-
tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/
closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
Roof console
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Centre and tunnel console
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Driver's door
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
77
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror
and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child
safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Lighting control (p. 148)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Driver display (p. 79)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Gearbox (p. 433)
Instruments and controls in right-
hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Steering wheel and instrument panel
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indica-
tors, front fog lamps/cornering lights*, rear
fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/
closing*, halogen headlamp levelling
Bonnet opening
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Roof console
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror
Centre and tunnel console
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
78
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media
Gear selector
Start knob
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Driver's door
Memories for power front seat*, door mirror
and head-up display* settings
Central locking
Power windows, door mirrors, electric child
safety lock*
Adjusting front seat
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Lighting control (p. 148)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Driver display (p. 79)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Gearbox (p. 433)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
79
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
indicator and warning symbols. The content of
the driver display depends on the car's equip-
ment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
Depress the brake pedal.
Activate ignition position I.
Open one of the doors.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12-
inch* and 8-inch.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
Driver display, 12-inch*
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator
Odometer
B
Clock Drive mode
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
Media player Distance to empty tank
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
80
On the left In the middle On the right
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Voice recognition
Compass
A
A
Depends on drive mode selected.
B
Accumulated mileage.
Driver display, 8-inch
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode
Road Sign Information*
Phone
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
81
On the left In the middle On the right
Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information
Navigation information*
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Door and seatbelt information Clock
Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stopp function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols
Odometer
B
Trip meter
Indicator and warning symbols
Voice recognition
Engine temperature gauge
Messages, in some cases with graphics
Compass
A
A
Depends on drive mode selected.
B
Accumulated mileage.
Dynamic symbol
The dynamic symbol in its basic
form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
ferent types of message. An amber or red marker
around the symbol indicates the degree of
severity of a control or warning message. With an
animation, the basic shape can be turned into a
larger image in order to graphically indicate
where a problem is situated or to clarify informa-
tion.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
82
Examples of indicator symbol.
Related information
Driver display settings (p. 83)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 92)
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 90)
Trip computer (p. 84)
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
83
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display's display options
can be made in the driver display's application
menu and in the centre display's settings menu.
Settings in the driver display's app
menu
In the app menu, you can choose which informa-
tion is shown on the driver display from:
Trip computer
media player
phone
navigation system*.
Settings in the centre display
Selecting information type
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Driver
Display Information
.
3. Select what should be shown in the back-
ground:
Show no information in background
Show information for current playing
media
Show navigation even if no route is
set
1
.
Selecting theme
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Tap on
My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
Glass
Minimalistic
Performance
Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Tap on
System System Languages and
Units
System Language to select lan-
guage.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
These settings are personal and are saved auto-
matically to the active driver profile.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
1
The map is only shown with the 12-inch driver display*. The 8-inch driver display only shows guidance.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
84
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display:
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank.
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display:
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity
of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates the distance to empty tank. Only an
amber-coloured bar remains when the fuel level
is critically low. Refuel the car as soon as possi-
ble.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Fuel tank - volume (p. 661)
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
play.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
85
12-inch driver display*.
8-inch driver display.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
Trip meter
Odometer
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Distance to empty tank
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto-
matically if the car is not used for at least four
hours.
The following information is registered while driv-
ing:
Mileage
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption.
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second.
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the remaining mile-
age with the fuel available in the tank.
The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining drivable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 86)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 87)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
86
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 87)
Driver display (p. 79)
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated val-
ues can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
the app menu, you can choose which information
is shown on the driver display.
Open and navigate in the app menu
2
using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1. Open the app menu in the driver display by
pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver dis-
play:
Distance to empty tank
Odometer
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis-
play of mileage
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O but-
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
2
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
87
Related information
Trip computer (p. 84)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 87)
Resetting the trip meter
Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk
switch.
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically
when the car has not been used for four or more
hours.
Related information
Trip computer (p. 84)
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driving
time are calculated since the last time the trip
statistics were reset.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
88
Trip statistics from the trip computer
3
.
Related information
Settings for trip statistics (p. 88)
Trip computer (p. 84)
Settings for trip statistics
Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics.
1.
Open the
Driver performance app in app
view in order to show the trip statistics.
2.
Press
Preferences to
change graph scale. Select resolution 1,
10 or 100 km/miles for the bar.
reset data after every trip. Performed
when the car has been stationary for more
than 4 hours.
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consump-
tion and total driving time are always reset
simultaneously.
Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via
system settings in the centre display.
Related information
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 87)
Trip computer (p. 84)
Resetting the trip meter (p. 87)
3
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
89
Time and date
The clock is shown in both the driver display and
the centre display.
Clock location
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
In certain situations, messages and information
may cover the clock in the driver display.
Settings for time and date
Select Settings System Date and
Time
in the centre display's top view to
change settings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or
down arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
When the car is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem,
Auto Time can be selected. The time zone
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca-
tion of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with
Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature is shown in the driver
display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
car.
Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
8-inch driver display.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
play a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is within the range
-5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
is also shown in the driver display as a warning
for potentially slippery conditions.
The snowflake symbol is also illuminated briefly in
the head-up display, if the car is equipped with
one.
Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
system settings in the centre display top view.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
90
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Changing system units (p. 128)
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or
that a fault or abnormal condition exists.
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended, this
information symbol illuminates and
a text appears on the driver display.
The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there is
a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Symbol Specification
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot detect
or warn of low tyre pressure as
intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a work-
shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbols flash when the direc-
tion indicators are used.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
91
Symbol Specification
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when the
automatic main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
the automatic main beam is off.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main
beam is on and with main beam
flash.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Symbol Specification
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger com-
partment heater/air conditioning
are preconditioning the car.
Symbol Specification
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating. If
the symbol illuminates with con-
stant glow then there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active driv-
ing experience. The system then
detects whether the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding of the rear sec-
tion up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Amber symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
92
Symbol Specification
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on.
AdBlue system
A
The symbol illuminates when the
AdBlue level is low or in the event
of a fault in the AdBlue system.
A
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 92)
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or condition exists.
Symbol Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates
when a fault has been indicated
which could affect the safety
and/or drivability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate
in conjunction with other symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates or flashes if
someone in a front seat has not
put on their seatbelt or if someone
in a rear seat has taken off their
seatbelt.
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated or
illuminates while driving, a fault has
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Visit the
nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a con-
stant glow when the parking brake
is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message
in the driver display.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
93
Symbol Specification
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driv-
ing if a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of colli-
sion with other vehicles, pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals.
Related information
Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 90)
Driver display (p. 79)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to oper-
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or
developer.
Boost Software License 1.0
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person or organization obtaining a copy of
the software and accompanying documentation
covered by this license (the "Software") to use,
reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and
transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative
works of the Software, and to permit third-parties
to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all
subject to the following: The copyright notices in
the Software and this entire statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer, must be included in all
copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all
derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative works are solely in the form
of machine-executable object code generated by
a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
94
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
95
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
96
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o freetype@freetype.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o devel@freetype.org
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<david.turner@freetype.org> Robert Wilhelm
<robert.wilhelm@freetype.org> Werner
Lemberg <werner.lemberg@freetype.org>
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
97
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
98
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson randeg@alum.rpi.edu
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
99
SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Application menu in driver display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
play provides quick access to commonly used
functions for certain apps.
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
of using the centre display. The figure is schematic - the
layout may vary.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad. The app menu makes it easier to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associ-
ated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
100
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Selection of trip meter, selec-
tion of what to show in the
driver display, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation Guide to destination, etc.
Related information
Driver display (p. 79)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
Handling the application menu in
the driver display
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Opening/closing the app menu
Press on open/close (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must first
be acknowledged before the app menu can
be opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1. Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
Related information
Application menu in driver display (p. 99)
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
101
Messages in the driver display
The driver display can show messages to inform
or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Message in the driver display
4
.
Message in the driver display
5
.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other infor-
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the
Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service
messages and their meanings.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Service urgent
Drive to work-
shop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immediately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Regular main-
tenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown before the next
service date.
Regular main-
tenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
4
With 8-inch driver display.
5
With 12-inch driver display.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
102
Message Specification
Time for main-
tenance
Shown at the next service
date.
Regular main-
tenance
Maintenance
overdue
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 102)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 103)
Message in centre display (p. 136)
Managing messages in the driver
display
Messages in the driver display are handled
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display
6
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display
7
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
6
With 8-inch driver display.
7
With 12-inch driver display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
103
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2).
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automati-
cally after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the
Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
this.
Related information
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 103)
Message in centre display (p. 136)
Handling a message saved from the
driver display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that need
to be saved are added in the
Car status app in the centre
display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
>
The saved message is shown in the
Car
status app.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom tile of
the home view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
104
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have two
buttons available to book service or read the
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message:
In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment
8
for help in booking service.
>
With
Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With
Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
sage:
In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started.
Related information
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
Managing messages in the driver display
(p. 102)
Message in centre display (p. 136)
8
Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
105
Overview of centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
106
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively
9
.
Function view - car functions that are acti-
vated or deactivated with a press. Certain
functions are also so-called trigger functions,
which means they open a window with set-
ting options. Examples of these include
Camera. Settings for the head-up display*
9
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
107
are also made from the function view, but
adjustments are made using the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and
apps for embedded functions, such as
FM
radio
. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Network
and connection information is shown on the
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication
about on-going background activity are
shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view.
Settings, Owner's
manual
, Profile and the car's saved mes-
sages are accessed from here. In some
cases contextual settings (e.g.
Navigation
Settings
) and the contextual owner's manual
(e.g.
Navigation Manual) can also be
accessed in the top view.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the tile to
expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with
media. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Extra tile - recently used apps or car func-
tions that do not belong in any of the other
tiles. Tap on the tile to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct interac-
tion to set temperature and seat heating for
example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of
the climate row in order to open the climate
view with more setting options.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 108)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Function view in centre display (p. 118)
Apps (p. 493)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 120)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 129)
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Media player (p. 502)
Phone (p. 517)
Climate controls (p. 210)
Switching off and changing the volume of
the system sound in the centre display
(p. 127)
Changing the appearance in the centre dis-
play (p. 127)
Changing system language (p. 128)
Changing system units (p. 128)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Message in centre display (p. 136)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
108
Managing the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov-
ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways.
An infrared light curtain just above the surface of
the screen enables the screen to detect a finger
that is just in front of the screen. This technology
makes it possible to use the screen even with
gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different proce-
dures for operating the screen:
Procedure Execution Result
Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc-
cession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fin-
gers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
109
Procedure Execution Result
Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps
or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open.
Drag apart Zooms in.
Drag together Zooms out.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
110
Returning to home view from another
view
1. Briefly press the home button below the cen-
tre display.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
2. Briefly press again.
> All tiles of the home view are set to their
default mode.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it
is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
drag the control to the desired temperature,
tap on
+ or in order to raise or lower the
temperature gradually, or
tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.
Related information
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 111)
Moving apps and buttons in centre display
(p. 120)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 122)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
111
Activating and deactivating centre
display
The centre display can be dimmed and reactiva-
ted using the home button beneath the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
The effect of using the home button that the
screen dims and the touchscreen no longer
reacts to touch. The climate row will still be
shown. All functions connected to the screen are
still running, such as climate, audio, guidance*
and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it
is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The
dimming function can also be used to fade the
screen so that it does not disturb while driving.
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
ton below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
mate row, which continues to be shown.
All functions connected to the screen are
still running.
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
screen.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Changing the appearance in the centre dis-
play (p. 127)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The
screen is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four tiles:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra tile.
An app or car function selected from the app or
function view starts in the respective tile of the
home view. For example
FM radio starts in the
Media tile.
The extra tile contains the last used app or car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The tiles show brief information about each dif-
ferent app.
NOTE
When the car is started, the home view's vari-
ous sub-views show information on the cur-
rent status of apps.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
112
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Status bar
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network and connection information
is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock and
indication that background activity is in progress
are shown on the right.
Top view
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open the top view by
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
the top downwards across the screen.
In the top view, access is always available to:
Settings
Owner's manual
Profile
The car's saved messages.
In the top view, access is given to the following in
some cases:
Contextual setting (e.g.
Navigation
Settings). Change settings directly in the
top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is run-
ning.
Contextual owner's manual (e.g.
Navigation
Manual). Gain access directly in the top view
to articles in the digital owner's manual that
are related to the content displayed on
screen.
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi-
ble and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during starting/
shutdown or when a message is shown on
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature and seat heating*.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate set-
tings.
Press the symbol to close the climate
view and return to the previous view.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
113
Application view
Application view with the car's apps.
Swipe from right to left
10
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view)
from the home view. Apps that have been down-
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as
FM radio, are found here. Cer-
tain apps show brief information directly in the
app view, such as the number of unread text
messages for
Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the tile
to which it belongs, such as
Media.
You can scroll down in the app view, depending
on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/drag-
ging from the bottom and up.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right
10
across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Function view
The function view with buttons for different car func-
tions.
Swipe from left to right
10
across the screen in
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate or deactivate
different car functions, e.g.
BLIS*, Lane Keeping
Aid
* and Park Assist*.
10
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
114
Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated or deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
right to left
10
across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Related information
Managing tiles in centre display (p. 115)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 120)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Open contextual setup in the centre display
(p. 129)
Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17)
Driver profiles (p. 133)
Climate controls (p. 210)
Apps (p. 493)
Function view in centre display (p. 118)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
10
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
115
Managing tiles in centre display
Home view consists of four tiles:
Navigation,
Media, Phone and an extra tile. These views
can be expanded.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
116
Expanding a tile from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a tile in the centre display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
117
Expanding a tile:
For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone:
Tap anywhere on the tile. When a tile is
expanded, the extra tile in the home view is
temporarily forced away. The other two are
minimised and only certain information is
shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the
other three tiles are minimised and only cer-
tain information is displayed.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded tile:
The tile can be closed in three different ways.
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
tile.
Tap on another tile (that tile will then open
in expanded mode instead).
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening or closing a tile in full screen
mode
The extra tile
11
and the tile for Navigation can
be opened out in full screen mode, with even
more information and more setting options.
When a new tile is opened in full-screen mode,
no information from the other tiles is shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go back
to the expanded mode, or press
the home button at the bottom
of the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
home view's standard view from full screen mode
- press twice on the home button.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 108)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 111)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
11
Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
118
Function view in centre display
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
home view by swiping from left to right across
the screen
12
.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for car
functions; see below:
Type of button Property Affects car function
Function buttons Have on/off positions.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be
a window to change seat position.
Camera
Headrest Fold
Head-up Display Adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
Park In
Park Out
12
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
119
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For
Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Press the button once briefly to activate or deac-
tivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-
tor is extinguished.
When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
Managing the centre display (p. 108)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
120
Moving apps and buttons in centre
display
The apps and buttons for car functions in the
app view and function view respectively can be
moved and organised as desired.
1. Swipe from right to left
13
to access the app
view, or swipe from left to right
13
to access
the function view.
2. Tap on an app or button and hold it down.
> The app or button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
3. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in
the view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in
order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move
an app or button outside the visible view, drag it
to the bottom of the view. New rows are then
added, where the app or button can be located.
An app or button can thus be located further
down and is then not visible in the normal mode
for the view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in
the view.
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
Related information
Function view in centre display (p. 118)
Apps (p. 493)
Managing the centre display (p. 108)
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar.
Symbol Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone net-
work.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
13
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
121
Symbol Specification
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
The car then shares the available
connection.
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Message in centre display (p. 136)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
122
Keyboard in centre display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
123
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
124
Row of suggested words or characters
14
.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among the
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all lan-
guage selections. If not available, the row will
not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depend-
ing on the context in which the keyboard is
used - either to enter @ (when an email
address is entered) or to create a new row
(for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to
enter one capital letter and then continue
with lower-case letters. Another press makes
all letters capital letters. The next press
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi-
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
entry, all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which in
number mode is shown instead of
, to
return to the letter keyboard, or
to
open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language.
To make it possible to change languages for
the keyboard, the languages must first be
added under Settings.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes
one character at a time. Hold the button
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
characters by hand instead.
Pressing the confirmation button above the key-
pad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
fers depending on context.
Variants of a letter or character
Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can
be entered by holding down the letter or charac-
ter. A box is displayed showing possible variants
of letters or characters. Press the required var-
iant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/
character is entered.
Related information
Changing keyboard language in centre dis-
play (p. 125)
Enter the characters, letters and words man-
ually in the centre display (p. 125)
Managing the centre display (p. 108)
Managing text messages (p. 523)
14
Applies to Asiatic languages.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
125
Changing keyboard language in
centre display
To make it possible to switch between different
languages for the keyboard, the languages must
first be added under
Settings.
Adding or deleting languages in
settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually adapted without
affecting the system language.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
System System Languages and
Units
Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the list.
> It is now possible to switch between the
selected languages directly from the key-
board for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under
Settings, the keyboard retains the same
language as the car's system language.
Switching between different languages
in the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the button in the
keyboard is used to switch
between the different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. Give a long press on the button.
> A list opens.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are
given.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
playing the list:
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan-
guage in the list without displaying the list.
Related information
Changing system language (p. 128)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 122)
Enter the characters, letters and
words manually in the centre
display
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter
characters, letters and words on the screen by
"drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the key-
board to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand.
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions
15
appear as they are written on
screen (1).
15
Applies to certain system languages.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
126
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll through
the list.
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ-
ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a
space in the free text field with handwriting
recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete the
next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Change text input language.
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
a word in the area for hand-written letters
(1). Write a word or parts of a word above
each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters
or words is shown (3). The most likely
choice is found at the top of the list.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
Deleting/changing characters/letters written
by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
Swipe horizontally from right to left
16
over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
16
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
127
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
the handwriting field
17
.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right
18
.
Related information
Keyboard in centre display (p. 122)
Changing the appearance in the
centre display
The appearance of the screen in the centre dis-
play can be changed by selecting a theme.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Then select a theme, e.g.
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
sible to choose between
Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
which the background is light and the text is dark.
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
light.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Related information
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Activating and deactivating centre display
(p. 111)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Switching off and changing the
volume of the system sound in the
centre display
The centre display can be used to change the
volume of the system sound or switch off the
system sound altogether.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Under
Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol-
ume.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Audio settings (p. 492)
17
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
18
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
128
Changing system units
Units settings are defined in the centre display's
Settings menu.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Continue to
System System Languages
and Units
Units of Measurement.
3. Select from the following unit standards:
Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> The units in the driver display, centre dis-
play and head-up display are changed.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Changing system language (p. 128)
Changing system language
Language settings are defined in the centre dis-
play menu
Settings.
NOTE
Changing the language in the centre display
may mean that some owner information is not
compliant with national or local laws and reg-
ulations. Do not switch to a language that is
difficult to understand as this may make it dif-
ficult to find your way back in the structure on
screen.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Continue to
System System Languages
and Units
.
3.
Select
System Language. Languages that
support voice recognition have a voice recog-
nition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display is changed.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Changing system units (p. 128)
Opening settings in the centre
display
Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre display.
Top view with button for Settings.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
by dragging/swiping from the top down-
wards across the screen.
2.
Press
Settings to open the settings menu.
3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
gate to subcategories and respective set-
tings by pressing again.
4.
Press
Back to go back in the settings menu.
Press
Close to close the settings menu.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
129
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Setting types in the centre display (p. 131)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 132)
Open contextual setup in the centre
display
It is possible to use contextual setup for most of
the car's basic apps so that you can change set-
tings directly in the top view in the centre dis-
play.
Top view with button for contextual setting.
The apps installed in the car from the beginning,
e.g.
FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
When contextual setup is available:
1. Drag down top view when an app is in
expanded mode, e.g.
Navigation.
2.
Press
Navigation Settings.
3. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
Press Close or the physical home button
beneath the centre display to close setup view.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g.
Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
Related information
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
130
Changing settings in the centre
display
You can change
Settings and information for
many of the car's functions via the centre dis-
play.
1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab or
by dragging/swiping from the top down-
wards across the screen.
2.
Press
Settings to open the settings menu.
3. Press on one of the categories and subcate-
gories to navigate to the required setting.
4. Change one or more settings. Different types
of setting are changed in different ways.
> The changes are saved immediately.
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types
of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Setting types in the centre display (p. 131)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 132)
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user data
and system settings should be restored to fac-
tory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
change of ownership. In the event of a change of
ownership it is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
Related information
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
131
Resetting settings in the centre
display
It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings
defined in the centre display settings menu.
Two types of reset
There are two different types of resets for set-
tings in the settings menu:
Factory reset - clears all data and files and
resets all settings to their default values.
Reset Personal Settings - clears personal
data and resets personal settings to their
default values.
Resetting settings
Follow these instructions to reset your settings.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Continue to
System Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Press
OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 132)
Setting types in the centre display
Different types of setting are changed in differ-
ent ways. See the table for a description of the
various types of setting.
Setting types
Setting
type
Description
Trigger
function
Starts an app or separate view
for more advanced settings
through a press on the text, e.g.
to connect a device with
Bluetooth
®
.
Radio but-
ton
Select a setting from several
options by pressing the required
radio button, e.g. to select a sys-
tem language.
Multi-
selector
button
Select a level for something by
pressing the required part of the
button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
level for City Safety.
Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by
pressing on the box to select/
deselect it, e.g. to select auto-
matic start of seat heating.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
132
Setting
type
Description
Slider Select a level for something
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select
volume level.
Display of
informa-
tion
No actual setting. Shows infor-
mation about something, e.g. the
car's identification number.
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Table showing centre display
settings
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of the
car's functions are collected.
There are seven main categories: My Car,
Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication,
Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of sub-
categories and setting options. The tables below
show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual.
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to
Driver Profiles. Other set-
tings are global, which means they are not linked
to a driver profile.
My Car
Subcategories
Displays
IntelliSafe
Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode*
Lights and Lighting
Mirrors and Convenience
Subcategories
Locking
Parking Brake and Suspension
Wipers
Sound
Subcategories
Tone
Balance
System Volumes
Navigation
Subcategories
Map
Route and Guidance
Traffic
Media
Subcategories
AM/FM radio
DAB
*
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
133
Subcategories
Gracenote®
TV*
Video
Communication
Subcategories
Phone
Text Messages
Android Auto
*
Apple CarPlay*
Bluetooth Devices
Wi-Fi
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Car Modem Internet*
Volvo On Call*
Volvo Service Networks
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcatego-
ries.
System
Subcategories
Driver Profile
Date and Time
System Languages and Units
Privacy and data
Keyboard Layouts
Voice Control
*
Factory reset
System Information
Related information
Overview of centre display (p. 105)
Changing settings in the centre display
(p. 130)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
erences and can be saved in one or more driver
profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved in
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
car is adapted to the settings of that specific
driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
In the car, the settings defined are either per-
sonal or global. Only personal settings are saved
in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation*, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
files.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
134
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver profiles.
They remain the same regardless of which driver
profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add
additional languages to the keyboard, these
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis-
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X -
the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Related information
Selecting driver profile (p. 134)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
(p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 135)
Table showing centre display settings
(p. 132)
Selecting driver profile
When the centre display has been started, the
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
screen. The driver profile last used is the one
that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It
is possible to change to another driver profile
after the car has been unlocked. However, if the
remote control key has been linked to a driver
profile then this is what is selected when the car
is started.
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
in the top of the centre display when the dis-
play has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 133)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 135)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
135
Renaming a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different
driver profiles used in the car.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles.
3.
Select
Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
4.
Tap in the box
Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to
change the name. Tap on
to close
the keyboard.
5.
Save the name change by pressing
Back or
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Related information
Selecting driver profile (p. 134)
Keyboard in centre display (p. 122)
Resetting settings in the driver
profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is station-
ary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press System Factory reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select one of the options
Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 133)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
is used with that specific remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it is
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
car is started, the
Guest profile will automatically
be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver
profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns
to the home view. The
Guest profile cannot
be linked to a key.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
136
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
file to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
>
When the message
Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6.
Press
OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
Related information
Driver profiles (p. 133)
Renaming a driver profile (p. 135)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Message in centre display
The centre display can show messages to
inform or assist the driver in the event of different
events.
Message in the centre display's top view.
The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
play's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has been
taken, the message disappears from the status
bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
tioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
137
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 137)
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 138)
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
Managing messages in the centre
display
Messages in the centre display are handled in
centre display views.
Message in the centre display's top view.
Some messages in the centre display have a but-
ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
For messages without buttons:
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
the message to close automatically after a
while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
Message in centre display (p. 136)
Handling a message saved from the centre
display (p. 138)
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
138
Handling a message saved from the
centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
of the centre display.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
Message in centre display (p. 136)
Managing messages in the centre display
(p. 137)
Messages in the driver display (p. 101)
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from the
driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
tion.
Incoming phone calls.
The head-up display shows warnings and infor-
mation relating to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road
Sign Information and incoming phone calls can
also be shown in the head up display.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
139
NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the follow-
ing:
use of polarising sunglasses
a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
objects on the display unit's cover glass
unfavourable light conditions.
IMPORTANT
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel.
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover
glass and make sure that no objects fall down
onto it.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates - read
the warning message in the driver dis-
play.
If the information symbol illuminates -
read the message in the driver display.
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
head-up display.
City Safety in the head-up display
When City Safety is activated, the information in
the head-up display is replaced by a graphic for
City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the
head-up display is switched off.
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 140)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 629)
Head-up display when replacing the wind-
screen* (p. 599)
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
140
Activating and deactivating the
head-up display*
The head-up display can be activated and deac-
tivated when the car has been started.
Press the Head-up Display
button in the centre display
function view. An indicator in
the button illuminates when the
function is activated.
Related information
Settings for head-up display* (p. 140)
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Settings for head-up display*
Adjust the settings for the head up display's pro-
jection onto the windscreen.
Settings can be defined in the centre display
when the car has started and a projected image
is displayed on the windscreen.
The setting is saved as a personal setting in the
driver profile.
Selecting display options
Select functions to be shown in the head up dis-
play.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3. Select one or more functions:
Show Navigation
Show Road Sign Information
Show Driver Support
Show Phone.
Adjusting brightness and vertical
position
1.
Press the
Head-up Display Adjustments
button in the centre display function view.
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
141
Lowering the position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
the brightness in the car's other displays.
The height position can be stored in the memory
function of the power* front seat.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
Head-Up Display
Calibration
.
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with
the steering wheel's right keypad.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 140)
Voice recognition
19
The driver can use voice recognition to control
certain functions in the media player, Bluetooth-
connected phone, climate system and Volvo's
navigation system*.
Voice commands offer additional convenience
and assist the driver to not be distracted so that
he or she can concentrate on driving, the road
and the traffic situation.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Voice control system microphone
19
Applies to certain markets.
||
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
142
Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
user saying commands and receiving verbal
responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as Bluetooth-
connected devices, and the voice recognition
system's responses are given via the car's speak-
ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set-
tings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal perform-
ance from support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Using voice recognition (p. 142)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
Using voice recognition
20
Depress the steering wheel
button for voice recognition
to activate the system and
initiate a dialogue using voice
commands.
Remember the following:
Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a
normal tempo.
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows
and panoramic roof* closed.
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
by saying "
Cancel".
with a long press on the voice recognition
button on the steering wheel
.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.
Example of voice recognition control
Press , say "Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book. If the contact has several
phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the
right category must be referred to.
So press
and say "Call Robin Smith
Mobile".
Commands/phrases
The following commands are always available for
use:
"
Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
"
Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
"
Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
replies with the commands available in the
current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions such as phone
and radio are described in specific sections.
20
Applies to certain markets.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
143
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
House numbers can be spoken individually
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty-
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
be given within the range 0-2300.
Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
Controlling a telephone with voice
recognition
21
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control com-
mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g.
Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers then the number category can also be
stated, e.g.
Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
Press
and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book.
"
Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
"
Recent calls" - displays the call list.
"
Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
"
Message to [contact]" users are reques-
ted to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
choose to send
22
or revise the message. For
this function to work, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Using voice recognition (p. 142)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
21
Applies to certain markets.
22
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
144
Voice control of radio and media
23
Commands for radio and media player device
control are shown below.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Media
" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
"
Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
"
Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song.
"
Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
"
Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel*
24
.
"
Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
"
Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
radio frequency in the current frequency
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
band is started by default.
"
Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
"
Radio" - starts FM radio.
"
Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
"
Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
"
DAB " - starts DAB radio*.
"
TV" - starts playback from TV*
24
.
"
CD" - starts playback from CD*.
"
USB" - starts playback from USB.
"
iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
"
Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected media source.
"
Similar music" — plays back music similar
to the music currently playing back from USB
devices.
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Using voice recognition (p. 142)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
Settings for voice recognition
25
Settings for the voice control system are
selected here.
Settings System Voice Control
Settings can be made within the following areas:
Repeat Voice Command
Gender
Speech Rate
Audio settings
Select audio settings under:
Settings Sound System Volumes
Voice Control
Language settings
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
.
Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
sage and help texts.
Settings System System Languages
and Units
System Language
23
Applies to certain markets.
24
Applies to certain markets.
25
Applies to certain markets.
DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL
145
Related information
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Using voice recognition (p. 142)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Audio settings (p. 492)
Changing system language (p. 128)
LIGHTING
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
148
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior
lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using
a thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Headlamp levelling
1
is also adjusted using a
thumbwheel on the instrument panel.
Exterior lighting
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the car is running, the follow-
ing functions are available in the rotating ring's
different positions.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights and position
lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked.
A
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights and position
lamps in daylight.
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
The Active main beam function can
be activated.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be
moved to
position from another position to switch on
only the position lamps instead of other lighting.
Volvo recommends that mode is used
when the vehicle is driven.
1
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
149
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to deter-
mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
Thumbwheel in instrument panel
A car with LED
2
headlamps* has automatic headlamp
levelling and therefore does not have the thumbwheel
for headlamp levelling.
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
1
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Interior lighting (p. 160)
Position lamps (p. 151)
Using direction indicators (p. 155)
Using main beam (p. 153)
Dipped beam (p. 152)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156)
Rear fog lamp (p. 157)
Active bending lights* (p. 156)
Brake lights (p. 158)
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 158)
Adjusting light functions via the
centre display
Several light functions can be adjusted and acti-
vated via the centre display, such as active main
beam, home safe lighting and approach lighting.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Active main beam (p. 153)
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Approach light duration (p. 159)
Using direction indicators (p. 155)
Opening settings in the centre display
(p. 128)
Function view in centre display (p. 118)
2
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
1
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
LIGHTING
150
Adjusting headlamp level
Headlamp levelling
3
is adjusted using one of the
thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
headlamp level. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
1. Keep the engine running or the car's electri-
cal system in ignition position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
headlamp level.
The position in which the thumbwheel should be
set for a number of load cases is shown below.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
Thumbwheel in position 0
Thumbwheel in position 1
Load case Thumb-
wheel
position
Only driver. 0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
1
Load case Thumb-
wheel
position
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
220 kg load in the cargo area.
1
Driver and maximum load in the
cargo area.
2
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
3
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
LIGHTING
}}
151
Position lamps
Position lamps can be used so that other road
users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The
position lamp is switched on with the rotating
ring on the stalk switch.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in ignition position
II or the car is running then the daytime running
lights are switched on instead of the front posi-
tion lamps. When the rotating ring is in this posi-
tion, the position lamps are switched on regard-
less of the ignition position of the car's electrical
system.
If the car is stationary but running, the rotating
ring can be moved to the position lamp
position from another position to switch on only
the position lamps instead of other lighting.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver should
turn to a position other than
.
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
switched on) to warn road users approaching
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light condi-
tions in the surroundings. The daytime running
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on
the stalk switch is in position
, or
as well as when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II or when the car is run-
ning. In position
, the headlamps change
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
||
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
152
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL
4
) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from day-
time running light to dipped beam in weak day-
light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Dipped beam (p. 152)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
in the
position, dipped beam is activated
automatically in weak daylight or darkness, when
the car's electrical system is in ignition position II
or when the car is running.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
the front fog lamps* are activated
the rear fog lamp is activated
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
Dipped beam is always switched on when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position II or when the car is running.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
switch must be in
mode for tunnel detec-
tion to work.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Daytime running lights (p. 151)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 606)
4
Daytime Running Lights
LIGHTING
}}
153
Using main beam
Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk
switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting
and should be used when driving in the dark for
better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle
other road users.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to
main beam flash position. Main beam comes
on until the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the steer-
ing wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in
position
5
or . Activate main
beam by moving the stalk switch forwards.
Deactivate by moving the stalk switch back-
wards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Active main beam (p. 153)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 607)
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the wind-
screen to detect the headlamp beams from
oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in
front, and then switches from main beam to
dipped beam.
Active main beam is activated with the rotating ring on
the stalk switch in position
.
The function can also take streetlights into
account. Main beam is reactivated when the cam-
era sensor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles
or vehicles ahead.
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
5
When dipped beam is activated.
||
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
154
If active main beam is deactivated while main
beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to
dipped beam.
When active main beam is activated, the symbol
illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
beam shines with slightly more than dipped
beam.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
Car with LED
6
headlamps*
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
ity
7
then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functional-
ity
7
then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu-
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom-
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Limitations for active main beam
The camera sensor on which the function is
based has limitations.
If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
play, together with the message
Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed man-
ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
be in the
position. The symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
When active main beam becomes available again,
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
the message goes out and the
symbol illu-
minates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
mum beam pattern when conditions are
favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for man-
ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con-
ditions so require.
6
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
7
Depending on the car's equipment level.
LIGHTING
155
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Using main beam (p. 153)
Limitations for camera unit (p. 347)
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend-
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
NOTE
This automatic flashing sequence can be
stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
Hazard warning flashers (p. 158)
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 608)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
156
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED
8
headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equip-
ment level.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel move-
ments to provide maximum illumination in bends
and junctions and can thereby provide the driver
with improved visibility.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-
tion, the
symbol illuminates in the driver
display at the same time as the driver display
shows an explanatory text.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti-
vated via the centre display's function view.
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The front fog lamps emit a stronger beam than
dipped beam and are therefore additionally
effective in fog.
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
is in position
, or .
Press the button to activate and deactivate. The
symbol in the driver display illuminates
when the front fog lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
the position.
8
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
157
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights*
The front fog lamps can include the cornering
lights function, which temporarily illuminates the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction
the steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or
in the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark-
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the
or position and the speed of the
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be activated and deacti-
vated via the centre display.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Rear fog lamp (p. 157)
Active bending lights* (p. 156)
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than
the normal rear lights and should only be used in
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or
dust so that other road users have an early warn-
ing of a vehicle ahead.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car,
on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
position
or
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
set to the
position
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
Lighting control (p. 148)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 156)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 610)
LIGHTING
158
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. It is also switched on when
the car is braked automatically by one of the
driver support systems.
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Brake functions (p. 425)
Emergency brake lights
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking.
The function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a
constant glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
high speeds.
After the driver brakes to a low speed and then
releases the brake, the brake light returns to nor-
mal glow.
The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at
the same time. These flash until the driver accel-
erates the car to a higher speed again or
switches off the hazard warning flashers.
Related information
Brake lights (p. 158)
Foot brake (p. 425)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 158)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
by means of all of the car's direction indicators
being activated simultaneously. The function can
be used to give a warning in the event of traffic
hazards.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
159
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
Emergency brake lights (p. 158)
Using direction indicators (p. 155)
Using home safe lighting
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, a symbol illumi-
nates in the driver display and position lamps,
exterior handle lighting* and number plate light-
ing are switched on.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Approach light duration (p. 159)
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
lighting at a distance.
The function is activated when the remote control
key is used for unlocking. At which point, position
lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate
lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo
area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened
within the activation time, the time for the lighting
in the outside handles* and the interior lighting
will be extended.
The function can be activated and deactivated via
the centre display.
Related information
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Remote control key (p. 239)
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
160
Interior lighting
The interior is equipped with several different
types of lighting to improve the experience. This
includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and
ground lighting.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes
from when:
the car has been switched off and its electri-
cal system is in ignition position 0
the car has been unlocked but it has not
been started.
Front roof lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Reading lighting
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
With the automatic system activated, the light
indicator in the button illuminates and the pas-
senger compartment lighting is switched on and
off according to the following.
Passenger compartment lighting:
illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked
comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
doors is open.
Rear roof lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
Reading lamps above the rear seat.
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units,
one on each side of the roof.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
161
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
tively when the lid is opened or closed.
Sun visor mirror lighting*
The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is
switched on and off respectively when the cover
is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Door sill lighting
The door sill lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
The lighting in the tailgate can be manually
switched on and off using a button attached to
the lamp*. Note that the lamp is off when the tail-
gate is opened if it was off when the tailgate was
closed.
9
There is also a torch* recessed in the right-hand
side panel in the cargo area.
9
Decor lighting
The ambient light is switched on when you open
the doors and is switched off when the car is
locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be
adapted in the centre display and also precisely
adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument
panel.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
ning. The ambience light can be adapted in the
centre display and also precisely adjusted using
the thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in the storage compartments in the
doors is switched on when you open the doors
and is switched off when the car is locked. The
brightness can be precisely adjusted using the
thumbwheel in the instrument panel.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel
console
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
when the car is locked. The brightness can be
precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the
instrument panel.
Related information
Adjusting interior lighting (p. 162)
Lighting control (p. 148)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
9
Only applies to Volvo Ocean Race.
LIGHTING
* Option/accessory.
162
Adjusting interior lighting
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used. The
interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumb-
wheel in the instrument panel, and certain light
functions can also be adjusted via the centre
display.
The thumbwheel, on the instru-
ment panel by the steering
wheel, is used to adjust the
brightness of the display light,
control light, ambient light and
ambience light*
Adjusting ambient decor illumination
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Under
Ambient Light Level, select from
Reduced and Full.
Adjusting ambience light*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
ning.
Changing the brightness of the lights
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under
Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose between
By Temperature and By
Colour in order to change the colour of the
light.
With the
By Temperature option, the light
changes according to the set passenger
compartment temperature.
With the
By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
further.
Related information
Interior lighting (p. 160)
Adjusting light functions via the centre dis-
play (p. 149)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
164
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains controls for windows, glass
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
laminated.
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is
laminated
1
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Panorama roof* (p. 171)
Power windows (p. 165)
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 168)
Using the sun blind* (p. 167)
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
screen* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Pinch protection for windows and
sun blinds
All windows and sun blinds* controlled electri-
cally have pinch protection which is deployed if
they are blocked by any object when opening or
closing.
In the event of blocking, the movement stops and
then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm
(approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or
to full ventilation position).
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate once more in the same direc-
tion without pinch protection, if this is done within
10 seconds after pinch protection deployment. In
other words, it is possible to force pinch protec-
tion when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when
ice is formed, by continuing to press the control
until fully closed.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
Related information
Reset sequence for pinch protection
(p. 165)
Operating power windows (p. 166)
1
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
165
Using the sun blind* (p. 167)
Panorama roof* (p. 171)
Reset sequence for pinch
protection
If any fault arises with the electrical functions of
the power windows, a reset sequence can be
tested.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
If the problem persists, or if it concerns the pan-
oramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop.
2
Reset the power window
1. Start with the window in closed position.
2. Then operate it in the manual position 3
times upwards to closed position.
> The system is initiated automatically.
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Operating power windows (p. 166)
Using the sun blind* (p. 167)
Power windows
The power windows are operated using the con-
trol panels in each respective door. The driver's
door has controls for operating all windows and
also to activate the child safety locks.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the
controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or
windows from being opened from the inside.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
The power windows are equipped with pinch pro-
tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec-
tion, a reset sequence can be tested.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
166
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Related information
Operating power windows (p. 166)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165)
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
The power windows are equipped with pinch pro-
tection. If any fault arises with the pinch protec-
tion, a reset sequence can be tested.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto. Move one of the
controls gently up or down. The power win-
dows move up or down as long as the control
is held in position.
Operating with auto. Move one of the con-
trols up or down to the end position and
release it. The window runs automatically to
its end position.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be I or II. The power win-
dows can be operated for a few minutes after the
car has been switched off and after the ignition
has been switched off - although not after a door
has been opened. Only one control panel can be
operated at a time.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
167
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with:
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph),
but they can be closed.
The driver always bears responsibility for fol-
lowing traffic regulations in force.
Related information
Power windows (p. 165)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Using the sun blind*
Sun blinds can be installed, built into each rear
door.
In the rear door - manually operated
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Hook with associated catch
Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the
hook in the upper door frame.
The window can still be opened and closed with
the sun blind up.
Related information
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165)
Power windows (p. 165)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
168
Rearview and door mirrors
The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used
to give the driver better visibility to the rear.
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror is adjusted easily by
angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror
can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dim-
ming* and compass*.
Door mirrors
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear to be further away
than they actually are.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel. There
are also a number of automatic settings that can
be linked to the memory function buttons for the
power seat*.
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Compass (p. 487)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 169)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dim-
ming when disturbed by light from behind.
Manual dimming
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a
control in the mirror's lower edge.
Control for manual dimming.
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control
towards the windscreen.
The control for manual dimming is not available
on mirrors with automatic dimming.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
169
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Auto-
matic dimming is always active while driving, apart
from when gearbox reverse position is selected.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior
rearview mirror and the door mirrors.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors
- one forward facing and one rearward facing -
that work together to identify and eliminate daz-
zling light. The forward facing sensor detects
ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor
detects the light from vehicle headlights behind.
For the door mirrors to be equipped with auto-
matic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must
also be equipped with automatic dimming.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
sors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Related information
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 168)
Angling the door mirrors (p. 169)
Angling the door mirrors
To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door
mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the
driver. There are a number of automatic settings
that can also be linked to the memory function
buttons for the power seat*.
Using controls for door mirrors
Controls for door mirrors.
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel.
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
170
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly.
1. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down
the L and R buttons simultaneously.
2.
Fold them out again by pressing the L and R
buttons simultaneously.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Folding in rearview mirrors electrically*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces.
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(ignition position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the
L
and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
cally stop in the fully extended position.
Angling during parking
3
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
Note that the button may need to be pressed
twice, depending on whether it was already pre-
selected. The button flashes when the door mir-
ror is angled down. When reverse gear is disen-
gaged, the door mirror automatically starts to
return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches
its original position after approx. 8 seconds.
Automatic angling during parking
3
With this setting, the door mirror is automatically
angled down when reverse gear is selected. The
folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted.
You can make the door mirror return to its origi-
nal position by pressing the L or R button twice.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
Related information
Rearview and door mirrors (p. 168)
Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
3
Only in combination with power seat with memory buttons*.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
171
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
tions. The front section can be opened vertically
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
tally (open position). The rear section is fixed
roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a
sun blind made of perforated fabric and located
under the glass roof to provide extra protection
from factors such as strong sunlight.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 172)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 174)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
172
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Operating the panorama roof*
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control in the roof panel and both are
equipped with pinch protection.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the moving parts.
Always operate the windows with caution.
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
Never leave children alone in the car.
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the power windows by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
Never put an object or part of the body
through the windows, even if the car's
electrical system is fully disconnected.
IMPORTANT
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and the sun
blind can be operated, the car's electrical system
must be in ignition position I or II.
It can also be operated using the remote control
key, keyless opening* with the door handle or the
central locking button.
WARNING
Check that children or other passengers are
not at risk of crushing when all the windows
are closed with:
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
173
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
trol is released during manual operation, or when
the glass reaches the comfort position
4
or the
maximum opening or closing position. The move-
ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are
also stopped if the roof control is operated again
in the opposite direction to the current direction
of movement.
The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also
equipped with pinch protection.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be fully closed.
Open and close ventilation position
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward once.
Close by pressing the control downward
once.
When the ventilation position is selected the front
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
amic roof is closed from ventilation position.
Fully open and close the panoramic
roof using the roof control
Operation, manual mode
Operation, automatic mode
4
Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
||
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
174
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual open-
ing.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for manual opening.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi-
tion - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for manual opening.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/down-
ward to the manual closing position instead.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position
- press the control backwards a second time
to the position for automatic opening and
release.
3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum posi-
tion - press the control backwards a third
time to the position for automatic opening
and release.
Close by repeating the preceding procedure in
reverse order - press the control forward/down-
ward to the automatic closing position instead.
Automatic operation - rapid opening or
closing
The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened
or closed simultaneously:
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
To close - press the control forward/down-
ward to the automatic operation position
twice and release.
Related information
Panorama roof* (p. 171)
Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's*
sun blind (p. 174)
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Automatic closing of the panoramic
roof's* sun blind
With this function, the sun blind is closed auto-
matically 15 minutes after the car has been
locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in
order to lower the passenger compartment tem-
perature and protect the car's upholstery from
sun-fading.
The function is deactivated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be activated or
deactivated in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
NOTE
The sun blind is also closed when all windows
are closed with:
keyless closing*
central locking button
remote control key.
Related information
Panorama roof* (p. 171)
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 172)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
175
Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds
(p. 164)
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Using windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen.
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor sensi-
tivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumbwheel when intermittent
wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip-
ers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win-
dow is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
176
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using the rain sensor
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv-
ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
symbol
is shown in the driver display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition posi-
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
177
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
sor button
.
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv-
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button or moving the stalk switch
up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service mode has
been deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor while the car is running
or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
Related information
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using the rain sensor's memory
function
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can be
activated in such a way that the rain sensor but-
ton does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
178
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using windscreen and headlamp
washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and
headlamp washers are started using the right-
hand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto-
matically at a defined interval when the head-
lamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the
symbol, is shown in the driver display, then
the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is
switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it. The head-
lamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is
switched on.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
}}
* Option/accessory.
179
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
Activating the rear window wiper and
washer
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling-
down period.
Select for intermittent wiping with the
rear window wiper.
Select for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS
* Option/accessory.
180
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Using automatic rear windscreen
wiping when reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The
function stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate wiping when reversing.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
182
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion* by pumping up/down.
1
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Change the backrest inclination by turning
the control knob.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
1
Only applies to the driver's seat.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
183
Power front seat*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forwards/backwards and
upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat
cushion can be raised/lowered as well as
adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination
can be changed. The lumbar support can be
adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the power front seat*
Set to desired sitting position using the control
on the front seat's seating section. To activate
the multi-function control and set the various
comfort functions, turn the control upwards/
downwards.
To activate the multi-function control and set
the various comfort functions, turn the con-
trol* upwards/downwards.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
adjusting the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
ing the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest inclination by adjusting
the control forward/backward.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
184
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low-
ered fully forward.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Storing memory function in power
operated front seat*
The memory function stores settings for the seat,
door mirrors, and head-up display*.
It is possible to store two different settings with
the memory function. The memory function key-
pad is located either on one front door or both*.
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button
Memory button
Store setting
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position.
2.
Press and hold the M button depressed. The
light indicator in the button illuminates.
3.
Within three seconds, press and hold the 1
or 2 button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected memory button an acoustic sig-
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
185
Using stored memory in a powered
front seat
The memory function stores settings for the seat,
door mirrors, and head-up display*.
Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front door
either open or closed:
Open front door
Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
ton.
Closed front door
Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-
up display stop in the positions that are
stored in the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
be stopped.
WARNING
Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Massage settings in the front seat*
Both the multi-function control* on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select between Swell, Tread,
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and
High.
Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and
Fast.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
186
Restarting massage
The massage function is deactivated automati-
cally after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the func-
tion is performed manually.
Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre
display, to restart the selected massage pro-
gram.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
Both the multi-function control on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display*.
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
massage is performed by air cushions that can
massage with different settings.
The massage function can only be activated
when the car's engine is running.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Massage in the seat settings view.
3. To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the touch
screen or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multi-function control's upper/
lower button. Change the setting in the
selected function by selecting directly in the
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by
using the multi-function control's front/rear
button.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
187
Adjusting the length of the seat
cushion in the front seat
Both the multi-function control* on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
To activate the multi-function control, turn the
control upwards/downward.
Adjusting the seat cushion
Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
multi-function control on the seat.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
Press the front section of the four-way
button (round) to extend the seat cushion.
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to retract the seat cushion.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the side support* in the
front seat
Both the multi-function control* on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
vide side support.
To adjust the side support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upwards/downwards
. The
seat settings view will be shown in the centre
display.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
188
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
Press the front section of the four-way
button to increase side support
.
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease side support.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
Activate the multi-function control* by turning the
control upwards/downwards. The seat settings
view will be shown on the centre display.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
4-way lumbar support provides options to adjust
the lumbar support. Use it by pressing the four-
way button located on the side of the seat's seat-
ing section. The lumbar support can be adjusted
forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards.
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
Press the four-way button (round)
upwards/downwards to move the lumbar
support upwards/downwards.
Press the front section of the four-way
button to increase lumbar support.
Press the rear section of the four-way
button to decrease lumbar support.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
189
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the passenger seat from the driv-
er's seat* (p. 189)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function is activated via the function view in
the centre display:
Press the Adjust Passenger
Seat button to activate.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
Move the passenger seat forward/backward
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest incli-
nation by adjusting the control forward/back-
ward.
Related information
Manual front seat (p. 182)
Power front seat* (p. 183)
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 183)
Storing memory function in power operated
front seat* (p. 184)
Using stored memory in a powered front seat
(p. 185)
Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat
(p. 186)
Adjusting the length of the seat cushion in
the front seat (p. 187)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
190
Massage settings in the front seat* (p. 185)
Adjusting the side support* in the front seat
(p. 187)
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front
seat (p. 188)
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be folded forward indi-
vidually.
WARNING
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
lead to trapping injuries.
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
For cars with automatic gearbox, set the
gear selector in P to prevent it from being
moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
IMPORTANT
The seat cushion on the integrated child
seat* must be in the lowered position before
lowering the rear seat backrest.
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must
be closed before lowering the seat.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
191
Lowering the backrest
Car with electronic folding
If the car is equipped with electronic* folding of
the rear seat there are buttons located in the
cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
manually.
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
be stationary and the tailgate open.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat.
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
To lower the backrest manually:
1. Lower the centre head restraint manually .
2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
right-hand rear seat backrests forward .
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
is automatically lowered to the horizontal
position.
Car without electronic folding
If the car is only equipped with manual lowering
of rear seat:
1. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
2. Pull forward the handles that are fitted in the
car's left and right-hand rear seat backrests.
3. The seat is released from the lock but
remains in the same position. Lower the
backrest to the horizontal position.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
2. Press the backrest until the lock engages.
3. The head restraint is raised manually.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Related information
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 192)
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
* Option/accessory.
192
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre
seat
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-
tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
The outer head restraints can be retracted via the
centre display's function view. You can lower the
head restraints in ignition position 0.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
}}
* Option/accessory.
193
Press the
Headrest Fold but-
ton to activate/deactivate low-
ering.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat*
For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer
head restraints are folded manually with the con-
trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure
.
For cars without electric folding, the head
restraints are fixed.
Related information
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 190)
Steering wheel controls and horn
The steering wheel houses the horn and con-
trols for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems
2
.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis-
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
2
Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
||
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
194
Horn
The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel.
Related information
Steering lock (p. 194)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Steering lock
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
can be perceived when the steering lock locks
or unlocks.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will lock automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked,
the steering lock will deactivate if the remote
control key is inside the passenger compartment
and the car is started by turning the start knob
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
Related information
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 193)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ-
ent ways depending on whether or not the car is
equipped with knee airbag
3
.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
3
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL
195
regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
With knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move
the lever back.
Without knee airbag
Lever for steering wheel adjustment.
1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
move the lever back.
Related information
Steering lock (p. 194)
Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 193)
CLIMATE
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
198
Climate
The car is equipped with electronic climate con-
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
tons in the centre console.
Some functions for the rear seat can also be
controlled from the climate controls* at the rear
of the tunnel console.
Related information
Climate zones (p. 198)
Climate control - sensors (p. 199)
Perceived temperature (p. 199)
Controlling climate control with voice recog-
nition (p. 200)
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Heater* (p. 233)
Air quality (p. 201)
Air distribution (p. 204)
Climate controls (p. 210)
Climate zones
The number of climate zones that the car is divi-
ded into governs the options for setting different
temperatures for different parts of the passenger
compartment.
2-zone climate
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides.
4-zone climate*
Climate zones with 4-zone climate.
With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
199
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sen-
sors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the right-
hand door mirror.
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger com-
partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also
an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate
control system air intake.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
ture.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
200
Controlling climate control with
voice recognition
1
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti-
vate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press and say one of the following com-
mands:
"
Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
"
Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
"
Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature
setting one step.
"
Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's side.
"
Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
"
Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air flow.
"
Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
the air flow to Max/Off.
"
Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
"
Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
regulation.
"
Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
"
Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates the air circulation.
"
Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
and door mirrors.
"
Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
"
Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster" - activates/deactivates
the heated windscreen*.
"
Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
"
Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
tivates the heated steering wheel*.
"
Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
"
Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
"
Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
"
Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
ventilation*.
"
Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Using voice recognition (p. 142)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
1
Applies to certain markets.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger com-
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
high.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec-
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function checks and indicates
whether or not all conditions have been met for
good air quality in the passenger compartment.
The indicator is visible in the climate view in
the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that are checked:
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
202
That the ventilation fan is activated.
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the con-
ditions for good air quality have been met.
Related information
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises
a series of modifications that keep the passen-
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and
asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
tion starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
matic air quality system that separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
contaminants in the passenger compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
level ozone.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
partment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the air quality
sensor* (p. 203)
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
203
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter (p. 203)
Activating and deactivating the air
quality sensor*
The air quality sensor is part of the fully auto-
matic air quality system Interior Air Quality
System (IAQS).
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac-
tivate the air quality sensor.
Related information
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec-
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is fitted.
Related information
Air quality (p. 201)
Clean Zone* (p. 201)
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 202)
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 202)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
204
Air distribution
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate control running the
air distribution takes place automatically. If nec-
essary, the air distribution can be controlled man-
ually.
Adjustable air vents
Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable,
which means that you can open/close the vent to
aim the air flow.
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-
partment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors.
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
Changing air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
ing air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
CLIMATE
}}
205
Related information
Air distribution (p. 204)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
Opening, closing and aiming the air
vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side win-
dows then misting can be eliminated.
If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening and closing the air vents
Air vents for the front seat:
Air vent knob
2
.
Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
Air vents for the rear seat:
The air vent's thumbwheel
2
.
Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
the air flow from the nozzle.
The longer the white lines on the thumb-
wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
2
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
||
CLIMATE
206
Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever
2
.
Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
Air distribution (p. 204)
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
Table of air distribution options (p. 207)
2
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
CLIMATE
}}
207
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from
other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
||
CLIMATE
208
Air distribution Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the
floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument
panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
CLIMATE
209
Related information
Air distribution (p. 204)
Opening, closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 205)
Changing air distribution (p. 204)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
210
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are con-
trolled from physical buttons in the centre con-
sole, the centre display and the climate controls
at the rear of the tunnel console*.
Physical buttons in centre console
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
Climate row in centre display
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Temperature controls for driver and passen-
ger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli-
mate settings.
Climate view in centre display
One tap on the centre button in the climate row
gives access to the climate view. The climate view
is divided into the tabs:
Main climate
Rear climate*
Parking climate*
Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or
by pressing the respective heading.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
211
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli-
mate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
Rear climate control*
All climate functions for the rear seat can be
regulated in the
Rear climate tab.
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func-
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regula-
ted in the
Parking climate tab.
Climate controls at rear of tunnel
console*
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Fan controls for rear seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
panel.
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-
ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat
controls* and the unlocking button are shown.
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature
can be changed via the climate panel and all
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
212
selected climate settings are shown. The screen
locks automatically after a period of inactivity.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Activating and deactivating heated rear seat*
(p. 213)
Activating and deactivating ventilated front
seat* (p. 214)
Activating and deactivating the heated steer-
ing wheel* (p. 215)
Activating auto climate control (p. 216)
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 216)
Activating and deactivating max defroster
(p. 217)
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
screen* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 221)
Regulating fan level for rear seat* (p. 222)
Synchronising temperature (p. 224)
Activating and deactivating air conditioning
(p. 225)
Activating and deactivating heated
front seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for heated seats is immediately available in
the climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated front seat* (p. 213)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
213
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated front seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level
and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level
to activate/deactivate automatic start of
heated driver's and passenger seat.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating heated front
seat* (p. 212)
Activating and deactivating heated
rear seat*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the front seat*
Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Activating and deactivating the heated
rear seat from the rear seat
With 2-zone climate:
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-
sole.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium
and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
214
With 4-zone climate*:
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel
console's climate panel to switch between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the
climate panel shows the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating
ventilated front seat*
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
comfort in a hot climate, for example.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
The system can be activated when the engine is
running.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
tilated seats is immediately available in the
climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
215
Activating and deactivating the
heated steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated steering wheel* (p. 215)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated steering
wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac-
tivated when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level to activate/deactivate automatic start
of heated steering wheel.
4.
Select
Low, Medium or High to select level
after the function has been activated.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated steer-
ing wheel* (p. 215)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
216
Activating auto climate control
With auto climate control activated, multiple cli-
mate functions are controlled automatically.
Auto-regulation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Give a short or long press on
AUTO.
Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically.
Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan speed
are changed to standard settings: 22 °C
(72 °F) and level
3 (level 2 in the rear
seat
3
).
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
and the button illuminates.
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regula-
ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti-
vated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
vated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
The air recirculation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
3
For cars with 4-zone climate*.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
217
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
when max defroster is activated.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
air recirculation (p. 217)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for air recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
Activating and deactivating air recirculation
(p. 216)
Activating and deactivating max
defroster
Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and
ice from windows.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre console
There is a physical button in the centre console
for quick access to max defroster.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
only be activated individually from the climate
view in the centre display.
Physical button in the centre console.
Cars without heated windscreen:
Press the button.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
||
CLIMATE
218
Cars with heated windscreen:
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button.
Activating and deactivating max
defroster from centre display
Max defroster button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to
5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the pre-
vious settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
219
Activating and deactivating the
heated windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated windscreen.
Physical button in the centre console.
Press the button repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
Activated heated windscreen
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
Activating and deactivating heated
windscreen from centre display
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the per-
formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.
NOTE
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
heated windscreen* (p. 220)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
220
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of heated
windscreen*
A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove
mist and ice from the window.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen should be activated/deacti-
vated when the engine is started. With automatic
start activated, heating will start when there is a
risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window.
The heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
screen.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated wind-
screen* (p. 219)
Activating and deactivating the
heated rear window and door
mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
console
In the centre console is a physical button for
rapid access to the heated rear window and door
mirrors.
Physical button in the centre console.
Press the button.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
Activating and deactivating heated rear
window and door mirrors from centre
display
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating automatic star-
ting of the heated rear window and door mir-
rors (p. 221)
CLIMATE
221
Activating and deactivating
automatic starting of the heated
rear window and door mirrors
The heated rear window and door mirrors are
used to quickly remove mist and ice from the
windows and mirrors.
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated rear window and door mirrors should be
activated/deactivated when the engine is started.
With automatic start activated, heating will start
when there is a risk of ice or misting on the wind-
screen/window. The heating switches off auto-
matically when the windscreen/window is suffi-
ciently warm and the ice or misting is gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the heated rear
window and door mirrors (p. 220)
Regulating fan level for front seat
4
The fan can be set to several different automati-
cally controlled fan speeds for the front seat.
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
Off, 1-5 or Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
4
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
222
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
The fan can be set to several different automati-
cally controlled fan speeds for the rear seat.
Regulating the fan level for the rear
seat from the front seat
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the
climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
1-5.
The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
by tapping on
2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
Regulating the fan level for the rear
seat from the rear seat
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-
nel console.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
1-5.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched
off from the climate view in the centre display.
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
223
Regulating temperature for front
seat
5
The temperature can be set to the desired num-
ber of degrees for the front seat's climate zones.
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to
open the controls.
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture, or
press
+/ to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Regulating temperature for rear
seat*
The temperature can be set to the desired num-
ber of degrees for the rear seat's climate zones.
Regulating temperature for rear seat
from front seat
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button to open the control.
5
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
||
CLIMATE
224
Temperature control.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
following:
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture
press
+/ to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
Regulating temperature for rear seat
from rear seat
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of
the tunnel console.
2.
Press the left or right-hand side
</> buttons
on the tunnel console's climate panel in
order to lower/raise the temperature gradu-
ally.
> The temperature changes and the screen
in the climate panel shows the set tem-
perature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Synchronising temperature
The temperature in the car's different climate
zones can be synchronised with the temperature
set on the driver's side.
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
the centre display's climate row in order to
open the controls.
2.
Press
Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car is
synchronised with the temperature set for
the driver's side and the synchronisation
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
The synchronisation is stopped by means of a
further press on
Synchronise temperature or
by means of changing the temperature settings
for a climate zone other than the driver's.
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
225
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
Activating and deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
The air conditioning button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in
Off position.
Related information
Climate controls (p. 210)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
226
Parking climate*
The climate of the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned or maintained while the
car is parked.
Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con-
trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis-
play's climate view.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 231)
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 232)
Preconditioning*
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 227)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
227
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
Preconditioning warms the passenger compart-
ment and engine or airs the passenger compart-
ment before driving. The function can use direct
start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
Starting/stopping from the centre
display
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extin-
guished.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
senger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi-
tioning heats the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-
senger compartment by blowing in air from out-
side.
The passenger compartment can also be precon-
ditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)
6
via the Volvo On
Call* app.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
6
Certain markets.
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
228
Preconditioning time setting*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning
is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
A time on a single date
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without repetition.
Related information
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Adding and editing time setting for precondi-
tioning* (p. 228)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
Adding and editing time setting for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
add a new one.
4.
Tap on
Date to set the time for a single date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
days of the week.
With
Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
5.
With
Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
With
Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
7.
Tap on
Confirm in order to add the time set-
ting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
CLIMATE
}}
* Option/accessory.
229
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Related information
Preconditioning
*
(p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
Activating and deactivating time
setting for preconditioning*
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
||
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
230
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Related information
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
Adding and editing time setting for precondi-
tioning* (p. 228)
Removing time setting for preconditioning*
(p. 230)
Removing time setting for
preconditioning*
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Edit list.
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
>
The icon changes to the text
Delete.
5.
Press
Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the list.
Related information
Preconditioning* (p. 226)
Preconditioning time setting* (p. 228)
Adding and editing time setting for precondi-
tioning* (p. 228)
Activating and deactivating time setting for
preconditioning* (p. 229)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
231
Climate comfort when parking*
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli-
mate, heats the passenger compartment to
comfort temperature.
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 226)
Starting and switching off climate comfort
when parking* (p. 231)
Starting and switching off climate
comfort when parking*
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
in the passenger compartment after driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre dis-
play.
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20°C (68°F).
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
Climate comfort when parking* (p. 231)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
232
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Symbol Message Specification
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
shop
A
to check the function.
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Parking climate* (p. 226)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
233
Heater*
The heater helps the engine and passenger
compartment reach the correct temperature
before and during driving.
The heater has two subfunctions:
Parking heater - heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment, if necessary, when the
parking climate control's preconditioning* is
activated.
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur-
ing driving.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
battery if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check in the driver display that the
heater is switched off. This symbol
is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
Related information
Climate (p. 198)
Parking heater* (p. 234)
Additional heater* (p. 235)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
234
Parking heater*
The parking heater heats the passenger com-
partment as necessary before driving if the car's
preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
It switches off automatically when a set timer
time or the heater's maximum run time expires, or
if the car is restarted.
The heater's maximum running time is
40 minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
to be used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the parking heater needs to
be used.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined
with short journeys may discharge the battery
and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then
the car should be driven for the same amount
of time that the heater is used in order to
ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
the same amount of energy as consumed by
the parking heater. The parking heater is used
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
shop should be contacted for repair.
Related information
Heater* (p. 233)
Additional heater* (p. 235)
CLIMATE
* Option/accessory.
235
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
Related information
Heater* (p. 233)
Parking heater* (p. 234)
Activating and deactivating automatic start of
auxiliary heater (p. 235)
Activating and deactivating
automatic start of auxiliary heater
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
vated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Additional Heater to activate/deac-
tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
Related information
Additional heater* (p. 235)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
238
Lock confirmation
When the car is locked or unlocked the direction
indicators confirm that locking or unlocking was
correctly performed.
Exterior indication
Locking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors
1
.
Unlocking
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors
1
.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed
2
, the car will be
locked but lock indication with hazard warning
flashers will only occur after all doors, tailgate
and bonnet have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator
The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
show the status of the alarm system.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
sating flashes.
Other indication
The home safe lighting and approach light func-
tions also provide indication of locking and
unlocking.
Indication in lock buttons
Front door
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
of either front door indicates that all doors are
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
guish in both doors.
1
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
2
Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
239
In rear door*
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Related information
Lock indication setting (p. 239)
Approach light duration (p. 159)
Using home safe lighting (p. 159)
Lock indication setting
It is possible to select how the car confirms
locking and unlocking in the centre display set-
tings menu.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Tap on
Visible Locking Feedback to select
when the car should give a visible response:
at Lock, Unlock, Both, or to switch off the
function.
Indication with retractable door mirrors*
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Mirrors and Convenience.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate or deactivate the function.
Related information
Lock confirmation (p. 238)
Remote control key
The remote control key locks and unlocks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote
control key needs to be inside the car for it to be
started.
Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
Tag)*, on right.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with sup-
port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand-
ard. The key must be in the front part of the pas-
senger compartment, e.g. in the driver's pocket or
the runnel console cup holder, for it to be possi-
ble to start the car.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
Keyless locking and unlocking of doors, tailgate
(Passive Entry*) is also available as an option.
The key then has a range extending in a semicir-
cle with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet)
out from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively.
With keyless starting and keyless locking and
unlocking, the remote control key can be located
anywhere in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start
the car.
Each one of the remote control keys included
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
certain profile is used, the car's settings are
adapted according to the profile.
Button-less key (Key Tag)
For cars equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-
less key (Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same
way as the normal remote control key when it
comes to keyless starting and locking and
unlocking
3
. It has no detachable key blade and
the battery cannot be replaced.
Remote control key buttons
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*.
Press and hold to close all of the windows
and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
alarm.
A longer press opens all windows simultane-
ously
4
.
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper-
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto-
matically when the button is held depressed.
The tailgate is also closed with a long press -
acoustic warning signals sound.
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the button
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
and the horn. The function can be turned off
with the same button once it has been active
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func-
tion switches off automatically after
3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and panoramic roof* are de-
energised by always taking the remote control
key with you when you leave the car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Double lock" function is also deacti-
vated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
3
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
4
The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
241
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting
and keyless locking and unlocking* can be dis-
rupted by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers -
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm
(4-6 inches).
If there is still interference - use the remote con-
trol key's detachable key blade to unlock and
then place the key in the backup reader in the
cup holder to disarm the car.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 248)
Immobiliser (p. 252)
Locking and unlocking with the
remote control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate
and the fuel filler flap simultaneously.
Locking with the remote control key
Remote control key.
Press the remote control key button to
lock.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
The driver's door must be closed in order for the
lock sequence to be activated
5
. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not
locked and their alarms armed* until they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Double lock" function is also deacti-
vated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote con-
trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked
6
.
Unlocking with the remote control key
Press the remote control key button to
unlock.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
When the remote control key does not
work
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be dis-
charged - in which case, lock or unlock the driv-
er's door with the detachable key blade.
Related information
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote con-
trol key (p. 243)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 251)
5
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking then all side doors must be closed.
6
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.*
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
243
Settings for remotely controlled and
inside unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for
remotely controlled unlocking.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
.
3. Select option:
All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
the doors requires two presses on the
remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made here also affect central
unlocking via opening handles from the inside.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Unlocking the tailgate with the
remote control key
It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by press-
ing a button on the remote control key.
Use the remote control key button to unlock the
tailgate and disable the alarm.
1.
Press the remote control key's button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel extinguishes in order to show
that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed.
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
remote control key's
button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
alarm functions armed.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the remote con-
trol key (p. 241)
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 270)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
244
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work prop-
erly it needs to be within a certain distance from
the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock-
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
or have a range that extends approx.
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
For keyless use
7
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered
by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but-
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
(5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key
blade.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message
Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
tems (p. 266)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
7
Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
245
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
The battery in the remote control key needs to
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var-
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key
is used.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message
Car key battery low
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display
and/or
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
The battery in the button-less key
8
(Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must be deleted from the car since it is still
possible to use it to start the car via back-up
start.
Opening the key and changing the
battery
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
8
This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
246
Turn the key, move the button to the side
and slide the back shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat-
tery cover anticlockwise until the markings
meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press-
ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
247
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat-
tery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press
it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
properly positioned and securely attached.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
248
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until
a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys
The car is supplied with two remote control keys.
A button-less key is supplied if the car is equip-
ped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Addi-
tional keys can be ordered.
A total of twelve keys can be programmed and
used for one single car. If additional keys are
ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one
per new remote control key. This also applies for
the key tag.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
remote control keys must be taken to the work-
shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked via driver profiles in the centre
display's top view, select
Settings System
Driver Profiles.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Red Key - restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner
to set limitations for certain of the car's proper-
ties. The limitations are intended to encourage
the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when
being loaned out.
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys-
tems will always be active. Other functions of the
key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo retailer. A total of eleven keys with restric-
tions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote con-
trol key.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
249
The restrictions are intended to act as measures
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The holder of a
Red Key cannot change settings defined for it –
a regular remote control key is required for this.
Related information
Red Key settings* (p. 249)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Red Key settings*
The holder of a regular remote control key can
define settings for Red Key. Certain driver sup-
port functions are always active.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
System Driver Profiles Red
Key
.
> The following settings can be defined:
Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise
Control
Reduced Maximum Volume
Max Speed Limit
Speed Limit Warning
Adaptive cruise control*:
Setting at first use: Longest intervals
Reduced max. volume (On/Off):
Setting at first use: On
Speed limiter (On/Off):
Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
Speed reminder (On/Off):
Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*
Lane assistance (LKA)*
Distance Warning*
City Safety
Driver Alert Control (DAC)*
Road Sign Information*
Related information
Red Key - restricted remote control key*
(p. 248)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
the left-hand
9
front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key.
all doors are emergency-locked.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated and deactivated.
The button-less key
10
(Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Return the key blade to its intended position
in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
Related information
Locking and unlocking with the detachable
key blade (p. 251)
Remote control key (p. 239)
9
This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
10
Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
251
Locking and unlocking with the
detachable key blade
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade
can be used to unlock the car from the outside -
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has
become discharged.
Unlocking
Pull out the front door handle on the left-
hand side
11
to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
der and release the handle so that the rear
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
clockwise in step (3).
Switching off the alarm*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1. Place the remote control key on the key sym-
bol in the backup reader in the bottom of the
cup holder in the tunnel console.
2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
release it.
> The control automatically returns to its
starting position - the alarm signal stops
and the alarm switches off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
11
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
252
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the
child safety locks.
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key or with the cen-
tral locking button on the driver's door.
NOTE
A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
A manually locked rear door with acti-
vated manual or electric child safety locks
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking but-
ton.
Related information
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 278)
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 245)
Remote control key (p. 239)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol Message Specification
Car key not
found
See
Owner's
manual
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting -
place the key on
the key symbol in
the cup holder and
try again.
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system
12
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.
12
Only certain markets and together with Volvo On Call*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
253
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system:
Symbol Message Specification
Remotely
immobilised
Car not pos-
sible to start
The remote-con-
trolled immobiliser
with tracking sys-
tem is activated.
The car cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Centre.
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
Ordering more remote control keys (p. 248)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
254
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the car's remote key system
can be seen in the following tables.
For more information about type approval, see
support.volvocars.com.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval numbers, see following
tables.
Country/Area Type approval
Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this
VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other
relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED).
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
255
Country/Area Type approval
Brazil MT-3245/2015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
256
Country/Area Type approval
Namibia TA-2016-02
South Africa TA-2014-1868
Remote control key
Country/Area Type approval
Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel-
bert, Germany
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
257
Country/Area Type approval
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia TA-2015-102
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
258
Country/Area Type approval
Oman
Serbia
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
259
Country/Area Type approval
South Africa TA-2015-432
The United Arab
Emirates
Key Tag
Country/Area Type approval
Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio
equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at
support.volvocars.com.
Wavelength: 433.92 MHz
Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW
Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Vel-
bert, Germany
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
260
Country/Area Type approval
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es
posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este
equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda
causar su operación no deseada.
Namibia TA-2015-103
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
261
Country/Area Type approval
Oman
Serbia
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
262
Country/Area Type approval
South Africa TA-2015-414
The United Arab
Emirates
Related information
Remote control key (p. 239)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
263
Keyless and touch-sensitive
surfaces*
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
making it more convenient to open the car if your
hands are full.
Touch-sensitive surfaces
Door handle
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the
handle while touching the lock surface risks
giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
Tailgate
The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure
plate that is only used for unlocking.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 265)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
264
Keyless locking and unlocking*
The car is locked and unlocked from the outside
using the door or tailgate handles if the car is
equipped with keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry)*.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for
unlocking only.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range for locking and unlocking to
work.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
open when locking the car with a side door han-
dle.
Touch the marked surface towards the rear
on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock
13
button on the bottom edge of the tailgate
before closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle and hold it there until all of the side win-
dows and the panoramic roof have been closed.
Locking when the tailgate is open
NOTE
If the car has been locked while the tailgate is
open, be careful not to leave the remote con-
trol key in the cargo area when the tailgate is
closed and the car is completely locked
14
.
13
Applies with power operated tailgate*.
14
If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
265
Keyless unlocking
Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin-
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked -
open the doors or tailgate as usual.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Related information
Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 265)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 265)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
Settings for Keyless entry*
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Tap on
My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock
3. Select option:
All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
For keyless unlocking of the tailgate, all you have
to do is have the remote control key in a pocket
or bag, for example.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
To open the tailgate:
1. Press gently on the rubberised pressure
plate beneath the tailgate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car for unlocking to
work.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
266
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
berised panel.
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.
It is also possible to unlock the tailgate hands-
free with a foot movement under the rear
bumper, see separate section.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Related information
Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 264)
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 274)
Antenna locations for the start and
lock systems
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock
system
15
and therefore has a number of built-in
antennas positioned at different locations in the
car.
Antenna locations.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door
16
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door
16
In the cargo area
16
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
keyless system's antennas with their pace-
maker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless sys-
tem.
Related information
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
267
Locking and unlocking from inside
the car
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
Central locking
Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
Unlocking using a button in the front
door
Press the button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
A long press on the
button opens all the
side windows simultaneously
17
.
Alternative unlocking method
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side
door.
Pull the opening handle on one of the side
doors and release.
> Depending on the settings in the remote
control key, either all doors will be
unlocked or only the selected door will be
unlocked and opened.
To change this setting, tap on
Settings
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
in the centre display's top
view.
Locking using a button in the front door
Press the button - both front doors must
be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
A long press on the
button closes all side
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Locking using a button in the rear door*
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
tive rear door.
Unlocking the rear door
Pull the opening handle.
> The rear door is unlocked and opened.
15
The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
16
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*).
17
The total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
268
Related information
Settings for remotely controlled and inside
unlocking (p. 243)
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the
car (p. 268)
Activating and deactivating child safety locks
(p. 269)
Unlocking the tailgate from the
inside of the car
The tailgate can be unlocked from the inside by
pressing a button on the instrument panel.
1.
Brief press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press on the
button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 270)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
269
Activating and deactivating child
safety locks
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
There is an electric* and a manual lock.
Activating and deactivating electrically*
The electric child safety locks can be activated
and deactivated in all ignition positions higher
than 0. Activation and deactivation can be per-
formed up to 2 minutes after switching off the
engine, provided that no door is opened.
Button for electric activation and deactivation.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi-
tion higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the but-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Symbol Message Specification
Rear child
lock Acti-
vated
Child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lock Deacti-
vated
Child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Activating and deactivating manually
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
ual door locks.
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
270
NOTE
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Detachable key blade (p. 250)
Automatic locking when driving
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select
Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate or activate this function.
Related information
Locking and unlocking from inside the car
(p. 267)
Opening and closing the power*-
operated tailgate
The car's tailgate can be opened and closed
electrically.
Opening the power operated tailgate
Choose one of the following options to open the
tailgate:
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
271
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
Light press on the tailgate handle.
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
Closing the power operated tailgate
Choose one of the following methods to close
18
the tailgate:
Press the button on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate remains unlocked.
NOTE
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch
has been left open. Thereafter, it must be
closed manually.
Long press on the button on the remote
control key.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
18
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
272
Long press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
Closing and locking
18
the power
operated tailgate
Press the button on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.
NOTE
One of the car's remote control keys must
be within range for locking and unlocking
to work.
When using keyless* locking or closing,
three signals will sound if the key is not
detected sufficiently close to the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.
Cancel opening or closing
Cancel opening or closing in one of the following
ways:
Press the button on the instrument panel.
Press the remote control key's button.
Press the closing button on the underside of
the tailgate.
Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath
the outside handle.
Using a foot movement*.
The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops.
The boot lid can then be operated manually.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening or closing then the
pinch protection is activated.
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
and the tailgate returns to the programmed
max. position.
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Pre-tensioned springs
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
gate.
18
A car with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
273
WARNING
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten-
sioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
Related information
Programming maximum opening for power
operated tailgate* (p. 273)
Opening and closing the tailgate with foot
movement* (p. 274)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Programming maximum opening for
power operated tailgate*
Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof
height.
To adjust max. opening:
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi-
tion.
NOTE
It is not possible to program an opening posi-
tion lower than half-open tailgate.
2.
Press the button on the underside of
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
cate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the
button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its max.
position when opened.
NOTE
If the system has been operating continu-
ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 2 minutes.
Related information
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 270)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
274
Opening and closing the tailgate
with foot movement*
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened and
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
If the car is equipped with keyless locking and
unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with
a foot movement.
The function with both opening and closing of
the tailgate is also available when the car is
equipped with power operated tailgate*.
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions:
Opening and closing with foot movement
Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and clos-
ing with foot movement requires power oper-
ated tailgate*.
The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range behind the car (approx. 1 metre (3
feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. This
also applies to an already unlocked car in order
to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash.
Opening and closing with foot
movement
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening or closing is activated - the tail-
gate is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is in open position then it is
always closed
19
on activation via foot
movement.
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
19
Applies to cars with power operated tailgate*.
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
275
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
vation to fail.
Cancelling opening or closing with foot
movement
Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening or closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or clos-
ing.
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
Related information
Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces*
(p. 263)
Opening and closing the power*-operated
tailgate (p. 270)
Remote control key range (p. 244)
Private locking
The tailgate can be locked, so-called private
locking which prevents it from being opened,
e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a
hotel or similar.
The private locking function
button is located in the centre
display function view. Depend-
ing on the current status of the
lock,
Private Locking
Unlocked or Private Locking
Locked is shown.
Related information
Activating and deactivating private locking
(p. 275)
Activating and deactivating private
locking
Private locking is activated with a function button
in the centre display and an optional PIN code.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be
activated.
Enter the security code before using for
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
first time the function is used. It can then be used
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code:
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
276
2. Enter the desired security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready for activa-
tion.
If the system has been reset then the above pro-
cedure needs to be repeated.
Activate private locking
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
function view.
Deactivate private locking
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the func-
tion view extinguishing.
NOTE
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
than three times, the security code can be
used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
Related information
Private locking (p. 275)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
Alarm*
The alarm provides audible and visual warnings
if anyone enters the car without a valid remote
control key or manipulates the starter battery or
alarm siren.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
20
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following
happens:
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times
21
.
Alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
The LED flashes once every other second –
alarm is armed.
After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
or until ignition position I has been selected
by turning the start knob clockwise and
releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
Movement and tilt sensors*
Movement and tilt sensors react to movements
inside the car, if the window is broken or if any-
one tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle
away.
The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the
event of movement in the passenger compart-
ment - air currents are also registered. For this
reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with
a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the
passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this:
Close the window and panoramic roof when
leaving the car.
If the passenger compartment or parking
heater is to be used – direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they do not point
upwards in the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to tempo-
rarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors.
Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors
when the car is being transported on a ferry or
train as these movements may affect the car and
trigger the alarm.
In the event of an alarm system fault
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message
Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
20
Applies to certain markets.
21
Applies to certain markets.
||
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
278
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
ance.
Related information
Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 278)
Reduced alarm level* (p. 279)
Double lock* (p. 280)
Activating and deactivating alarms*
The alarm is armed when the car is locked.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
press the remote control key's lock button
touch the marked surface on the outside of
the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised
pressure plate
22
.
If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/
unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the
button on the underside of the tailgate can
also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.
A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every
two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is
armed.
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:
press the remote control key's unlock button
grip one of the door handles or press on the
tailgate's rubberised pressure plate
22
.
22
Only applies to a car with keyless locking and unlocking* (Passive Entry).
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
279
Deactivate the alarm without a functioning
remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the
remote control key's battery is dead.
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote control key on the key sym-
bol in the backup reader in the tunnel con-
sole's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Switching off a triggered alarm
Press the remote control key's unlock button
or set the car in ignition position I by turning
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Automatic arming and rearming of the
alarm
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is armed automati-
cally after a certain delay after the driver's door
has been opened and closed without being
locked.
To change this setting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select
Passive Arming Deactivation to
deactivate the function temporarily.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 277)
Reduced alarm level*
A reduced alarm level means that the movement
and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
port on a car train or car ferry.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display
function view to switch off the
movement and tilt sensors
when subsequently locking the
car.
At the same time, the double lock function is
deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
reduced alarm level must be reactivated.
Related information
Alarm* (p. 277)
Double lock* (p. 280)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
280
Double lock*
Double lock means that all opening handles are
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside.
Double locks are activated with the remote con-
trol key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Double locks are activated with a delay of about
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
If a door is opened within the delay time then the
sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deacti-
vated.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when double locks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm will be trig-
gered.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the double lock in order
to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Related information
Temporarily deactivating double locks*
(p. 280)
Alarm* (p. 277)
Temporarily deactivating double
locks*
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
double lock function should be deactivated, to
allow unlocking from the inside.
Press the Reduced Guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to deacti-
vate the double lock function
temporarily.
This also means that the alarm's movement and
tilt detectors* are switched off.
After this,
Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
tre display and double locks are temporarily
deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when double locks
are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for
a maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
double lock function must be deactivated again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
Related information
Double lock* (p. 280)
Alarm* (p. 277)
KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
281
Detection of unknown car
component*
The "Foreign Component Detection" function
can detect whether an unknown car component
has been connected to the car.
Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
display shows a message
Unknown car part.
Service required, unknown car part found.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Related information
Volvo service programme (p. 590)
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
284
Driving support systems
The car is equipped with different driver support
systems which can assist the driver in different
situations, either actively or passively.
The systems can, for example, help the driver to
hold a set speed or a certain time interval to the
vehicle in front, prevent a collision by warning the
driver and brake the car or help the driver to park.
Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while
others are options. This also varies depending on
market.
Related information
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
Stability system Roll Stability Control
(p. 285)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Cruise Control (p. 298)
Distance Warning* (p. 303)
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Radar unit (p. 337)
Camera unit (p. 346)
City Safety (p. 350)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Driver Alert Control (p. 378)
Lane assistance (p. 380)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Park Assist* (p. 397)
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
Speed-dependent steering force
Speed related power steering causes the steer-
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv-
ity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires only a slight effort.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be per-
ceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message as well as a STEERING WHEEL
symbol.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
285
WARNING
While the power steering is working at
reduced power, the driver support functions
with steering assistance are not available.
In such a situation, the driver display shows
the
Power steering failure or Power
Steering Assist Temporarily Reduced
message, combined with a STEERING
WHEEL symbol.
Change the steering force level*
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre dis-
play's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering force
Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur-
ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Lane assistance (p. 380)
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
Stability system Roll Stability
Control
The stability system RSC
1
minimises the risk of
overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
manoeuvre or if the car skids.
The RSC system registers if and how much the
car's lateral inclination changes. This information
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
tem improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
for safe driving.
1
Roll Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
286
Electronic stability control
Electronic Stability Control (ESC
2
) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
The driver display shows this
symbol when the ESC system
is engaged.
Braking from the ESC system
may be heard as a pulsing
sound, and the car may accel-
erate more slowly than expected when applying
the throttle.
The ESC system consists of the following sub-
functions:
Stability function
3
Spin control and traction control system
Engine Drag Control
Trailer stability assist
WARNING
The stability system ESC is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Stability function
3
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin control and traction control system
The function is active at low speed and brakes
the drive wheels that spin so that additional trac-
tion shall be transferred from the drive wheels
that are not spinning.
The function also prevents the driving wheels
from spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (EDC
4
) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*
5
Trailer stability assist (TSA
6
) stabilises a car tow-
ing a trailer in situations where they begin snak-
ing. Also see section "Trailer stability assist" for
more information.
NOTE
The TSA function is deactivated if ESC Sport
Mode is activated.
Related information
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 287)
Activating/deactivating Sport mode in Elec-
tronic Stability Control (p. 287)
2
Electronic Stability Control
3
Also known as Active Yaw Control.
4
Engine Drag Control
5
Trailer stability assist is included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed.
6
Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
287
Limitation for sport mode in Electronic Stabil-
ity Control (p. 288)
Symbols and messages for electronic stabil-
ity control (p. 289)
Sport mode for electronic stability
control
The ESC
7
system is always activated — it can-
not be switched off. However, the driver can
select
ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a
more active driving experience.
With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction
selected, intervention from ESC is reduced and
the car is allowed to skid more and greater con-
trol than normal is thus transferred to the driver.
When
ESC Sport Mode is selected, ESC can be
considered as deactivated, despite helping the
driver in many cases.
NOTE
With the ESC Sport Mode function
selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA
8
) is
deactivated.
ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum trac-
tion if the car has become bogged down or is
driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or
deep snow.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
Towbar* (p. 472)
Activating/deactivating Sport mode
in Electronic Stability Control
The ESC
9
system is always activated — it can-
not be switched off. However, the driver can
select sport mode, which allows for a more
active driving experience.
The Sport mode is activated/
deactivated in the centre dis-
play's function view.
Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in the
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated - a
green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
The driver display indicates activated
ESC Sport Mode by displaying this
symbol with a constant glow until the
function is deactivated or the engine is
switched off. The next time the engine is started,
the ESC system is back in its normal mode again.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
7
Electronic Stability Control
8
Trailer Stability Assist
9
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
288
Limitation for sport mode in
Electronic Stability Control
There are certain limitations associated with the
ESC
10
system's subfunction
ESC Sport Mode
being activated.
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the following functions is
activated:
Speed limiter
Cruise control
Adaptive cruise control
Pilot Assist.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
10
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
289
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis-
play.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Constant glow for
approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
See the message in the driver display.
ESC
Service required
ESC system disengaged.
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
DRIVER SUPPORT
290
Speed Limiter
A speed limiter (SL
11
) can be likened to a
reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the
speed using the accelerator pedal but is preven-
ted from accidentally exceeding a pre-
selected/set maximum speed by the speed lim-
iter.
Buttons and symbols for functions
12
.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum
speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed
: From standby mode - activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby mode
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
WARNING
The Speed Limiter function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The driver must always pay attention to
traffic conditions and take action if the
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita-
ble speed.
The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
Limitations for Speed Limiter (p. 294)
Activating and starting the Speed Limiter
(p. 291)
Managing speed for the Speed Limiter
(p. 291)
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode (p. 292)
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from standby
mode (p. 293)
Deactivating the Speed Limiter (p. 293)
Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 294)
Limitations for Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 297)
Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter
(p. 296)
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
Speed Limiter (p. 297)
11
Speed Limiter
12
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
291
Activating and starting the Speed
Limiter
The speed limiter function (SL
13
) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
ulate the speed.
Set the speed limiter in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function for speed limiter
(4).
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter
is set in standby mode.
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi-
mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
When the speed limiter is in standby mode
and the
symbol is shown - press the
steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Managing speed for the Speed
Limiter
The speed limiter (SL
14
) can be set to different
speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
13
Speed Limiter
14
Speed Limiter
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
292
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and
set it in standby mode
The speed limiter (SL
15
) can be temporarily
deactivated and set in standby mode.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be temporarily deacti-
vated and overridden with the accelerator pedal
without the speed limiter first having to be set in
standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly acceler-
ate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it to interrupt acceleration when the
desired speed has been reached.
> In this mode, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
15
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
293
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
The speed limiter (SL
16
) can be reactivated after
having been temporarily deactivated and placed
in standby mode.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The driver display's speed limit markings
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
car's speed is then limited again by the
last stored maximum speed.
or
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
its current speed as the maximum speed.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Deactivating the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter (SL
17
) can be deactivated.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
1.
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
which deletes the set/stored maximum
speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
16
Speed Limiter
17
Speed Limiter
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
294
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Limitations for Speed Limiter
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
case, the driver is alerted by the message
Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Automatic Speed Limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL
18
) function
helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
speed to the speed shown on the road signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL
19
) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa-
tion from the Road Sign Information
20
function to
automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
18
Automatic Speed Limiter
19
Speed Limiter
20
Road Sign Information – RSI
DRIVER SUPPORT
295
WARNING
The ASL function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-
related road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a
suitable speed.
ASL is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which speed
limiter function is active:
Symbol SL ASL
A
Sign symbol
B
after "70" = ASL is acti-
vated.
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
B
See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
the speedometer) can be shown in
three colours with the following mean-
ings:
Colour of sign
symbol
Meaning
Greenish yellow ASL is active
Grey ASL has been set in
standby mode
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
sign not being read.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
296
Activate/deactivate Automatic
Speed Limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL
21
)
can be activated and deactivated as a supple-
ment to the speed limiter (SL
22
).
Activate ASL
The Speed Sign Assist but-
ton is located in the function
view of the centre display.
To activate the automatic speed limiter:
1.
Press the
Speed Sign Assist button.
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi-
cator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
2.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
NOTE
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI is not
activated.
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
When the Automatic Speed Limiter func-
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. In this situa-
tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted
either - to be able to adjust settings as
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
activated.
Deactivate ASL
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
the function view.
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi-
cation becomes GREY - SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only
the maximum speed stored in memory.
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
21
Automatic Speed Limiter
22
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
297
Changing the tolerance for the
Automatic Speed Limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL
23
)
can be set for different tolerance levels.
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Buttons and symbols for functions
24
.
Press the steering wheel button (1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected tol-
erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed -
then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is
deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
be shown with a RED indicator on the
speedometer.
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Limitations for Automatic Speed
Limiter
Automatic speed limitation takes place using
speed information from the RSI
25
function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If RSI
25
cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI
25
func-
tion can once again interpret and provide speed
information to the ASL.
See also the section "Limitations for Road Sign
Information".
Related information
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
23
Automatic Speed Limiter
24
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
25
Road Sign Information - RSI
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
298
Cruise Control
The cruise control (CC
26
) helps the driver main-
tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
driving on motorways and long, straight roads in
regular traffic flows.
Overview
Buttons and symbols for functions
27
.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates cruise
control and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
WARNING
The cruise control function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
Activating and starting Cruise Control
(p. 299)
Managing speed for the Cruise Control
(p. 300)
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it in
standby mode (p. 301)
26
Cruise Control
27
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
299
Reactivating Cruise Control from standby
mode (p. 301)
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 302)
Activating and starting Cruise
Control
The cruise control function (CC
28
) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
ulate the speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Set cruise control in standby mode
To set cruise control in standby mode:
Press (1) or (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise con-
trol can then be activated.
Activating/starting cruise control
In order to start the Cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must be
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
To start the cruise control:
With the symbol/function displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Related information
Cruise Control (p. 298)
28
Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
300
Managing speed for the Cruise
Control
Cruise control (CC
29
) can be set to different
speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (4) has moved to the
desired speed
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler-
ation by engine braking. In this case the driver
can temporarily disable foot brake application by
Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
matic foot braking and then uses engine
braking only.
Cruise control dependence on drive
mode
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed
may vary depending on the selected drive
mode
30
.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera-
tions and decelerations become smoother com-
pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and
environmental economy. This can cause the car's
speed to be temporarily above or below the set
speed.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise".
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel-
erations and decelerations are felt more strongly
and seem more direct compared to other modes.
Related information
Cruise Control (p. 298)
29
Cruise Control
30
See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
301
Deactivate Cruise Control and set it
in standby mode
Cruise control (CC
31
) can be temporarily deacti-
vated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To set cruise control in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used
the gear selector is moved to N position
the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
than 1 minute
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
wheels lose traction
engine speed is too low/high
brake temperature is too high
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
Related information
Cruise Control (p. 298)
Reactivating Cruise Control from
standby mode
Cruise control (CC
32
) can be temporarily deacti-
vated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To start cruise control from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
31
Cruise Control
32
Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
302
or
To start cruise control from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Cruise Control (p. 298)
Deactivating Cruise Control
Cruise Control — CC can be deactivated.
Buttons and symbols for functions
33
.
To deactivate cruise control:
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button (1) or
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con-
trol
(4) is extinguished - which
deletes the set/stored speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Related information
Cruise Control (p. 298)
33
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
303
Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning
34
function can assist the
driver to notice that the time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead may be too short.
However, the requirement is that the car is
equipped with a Head-up display to be able to
show Distance Warning, which is then displayed
with a symbol on the windscreen as long as the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preselected value.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No
distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance Alert is only available on cars
that can display information on the wind-
screen with a Head-up Display.
Distance warning is deactivated during
the time the adaptive cruise control is
active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time win-
dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
preset value – the speed of the driver's vehi-
cle is not affected.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
Related information
Head-up display for Distance Warning
(p. 303)
Activating/deactivating Distance Warning
(p. 304)
Setting the time interval for Distance Warn-
ing (p. 304)
Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 305)
Head-up display for Distance
Warning
35
In cars equipped with head up display*, a sym-
bol is shown on the windscreen for as long as
the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter
than the preset value.
Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen
36
.
However, this presupposes that the Show Driver
Support function is activated via settings in the
car's menu system; see the section "Head up
display" for how this works.
34
Distance Alert
35
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
36
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 303)
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Activating/deactivating Distance
Warning
37
The Distance Warning function can be set with
different time intervals or switched off.
On/Off
Press the Distance Alert but-
ton in the centre display func-
tion view.
GREEN button indication - Distance Warning
is activated.
GREY button indication - Distance Warning
is deactivated.
Distance Warning is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 303)
Setting the time interval for
Distance Warning
38
The Distance Warning function can be set with
different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when the adap-
tive cruise control function is activated.
37
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
38
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
305
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
The set time window is also used by the
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
functions.
WARNING
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 303)
Limitations of Distance Warning
39
The Distance Warning function may have limita-
tions in certain situations.
WARNING
The Distance Warning function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
a shorter time window than set or that the
warning is temporarily absent.
Extremely high speeds can cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win-
dow than that set due to limitations in
radar unit range.
Distance Warning is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
39
The Distance Warning function is only available in cars that can display information on the windscreen with a so-called Head-up display.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
306
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
Distance Warning* (p. 303)
Adaptive Cruise Control*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
40
) helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax-
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor-
ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead
41
.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road
is clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
The adaptive cruise control is not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsi-
ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
40
Adaptive Cruise Control
41
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
307
Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies in cases of large speed dif-
ferences or if the vehicle in front brakes sud-
denly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit,
braking may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
The Adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the sys-
tem does not detect a vehicle ahead.
The adaptive cruise control does not
brake for humans or animals, and not for
small vehicles such as bicycles and
motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncom-
ing, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
demanding situations, such as in city traf-
fic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com-
ponents must only be performed at a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
41
.
: Activates the adaptive cruise control
from standby mode and resumes stored
speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates the
adaptive cruise control and stores current
speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
41
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
308
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Driver display
Indication of speeds
41
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise
control".
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control and Collision risk
warning (p. 309)
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise Control
if there is a risk of collision (p. 309)
Activating and starting Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 310)
Managing speed with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 311)
Setting time interval for Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 312)
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 313)
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 315)
Starting overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control (p. 315)
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 315)
Changing target with Adaptive Cruise Control
(p. 316)
Automatic braking with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol (p. 316)
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise Control
(p. 317)
Change between Cruise Control and Adap-
tive Cruise Control (p. 318)
Symbols and messages for Adaptive Cruise
Control (p. 320)
41
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
309
Adaptive Cruise Control and
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
42
.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected -
hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay.
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Head-up display for Adaptive Cruise
Control if there is a risk of collision
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash-
ing symbol.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
43
.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
42
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
43
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
310
Activating and starting Adaptive
Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
44
) must first be
activated and then started if it is to control the
speed and distance.
Setting the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap-
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as
follows:
Press steering wheel button (2) or (3) to
scroll to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
Starting/activating the adaptive cruise
control
In order to start the ACC the following require-
ments apply:
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
With the symbol/function (4) displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(1).
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
figures in the centre of the speedometer.
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance
symbol shows two vehicles.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
44
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
311
Managing speed with Adaptive
Cruise Control
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
45
) can be set
to different speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed.
: Reduces stored speed.
Stored speed.
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(2):
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi-
mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
45
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
312
Setting time interval for Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
46
) can be
set to different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when the Dis-
tance Warning function is activated.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehi-
cle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval
47
.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter-
val to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con-
trol increases the time interval slightly.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window.
WARNING
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select how ACC shall maintain the
distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
46
Adaptive Cruise Control
47
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
313
Select one of the following options:
Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
which means longer time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean
heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise con-
trol" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Deactivating/reactivating Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC
48
) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can later be reactivated.
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and
set it in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
and set it in standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
>
The
symbol on the driver display
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
the stored speed in the centre of the
speedometer changes from BEIGE to
GREY.
WARNING
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warn-
ing function instead.
48
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
314
Standby mode on driver intervention
The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti-
vated and set in standby mode if:
the foot brake is used.
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control
ESC
49
. If any of the other systems stops working,
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated auto-
matically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
the driver opens the door.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
engine speed is too low/high.
one or more wheels lose traction.
brake temperature is high.
the parking brake is applied.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Reactivating adaptive cruise control
from standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
49
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
315
Overtaking assistance with Adaptive
Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
50
) can assist the
driver when overtaking other vehicles.
How overtaking assistance works
When ACC is following another vehicle and the
driver indicates the intention to overtake by acti-
vating the direction indicator
51
, adaptive cruise
control helps by accelerating the vehicle towards
the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle
reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi-
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Starting overtaking assistance with
Adaptive Cruise Control
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
ing Assistance to be activated:
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
the stored ACC speed must be high enough
for overtaking to take place safely.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with Adaptive Cruise
Control
The overtaking assistance function may have lim-
ited functionality in certain situations.
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
tem, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
tions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
rarily setting ACC
52
in the standby mode.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
50
Adaptive Cruise Control
51
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
52
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
316
Changing target with Adaptive
Cruise Control
In combination with automatic gearbox, the
adaptive cruise control (ACC
53
) has functionality
for change of target at certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When adaptive cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down
for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is
changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate
to the stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehi-
cle or some other object, such as a speed
bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap-
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Automatic braking with Adaptive
Cruise Control
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC
54
) has a spe-
cial brake function in slow traffic and while sta-
tionary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
one of the following ways:
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
ing forward within 6 seconds.
53
Adaptive Cruise Control
54
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
317
NOTE
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
disengaged.
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes
are released and the car may start to roll - the
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
the parking brake is applied
the gear selector is moved to
P
,
N
, or
R
posi-
tion
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Limitations for Adaptive Cruise
Control
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
55
) may have limita-
tions in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
Drive mode
Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
55
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
Change between Cruise Control
and Adaptive Cruise Control
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
56
)
the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC
57
) and ACC.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise
control is active:
CC ACC
A A
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
Changing from ACC to CC
Proceed as follows:
1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode
using steering wheel button .
2.
Press the
Cruise Control button in the cen-
tre display's function view - the button's indi-
cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button .
> Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
rent speed.
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that the
car:
no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
when necessary.
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
ACC will be activated automatically the next time
the engine is started.
Changing from CC to ACC
Proceed as follows:
1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the
steering wheel button.
56
Adaptive Cruise Control
57
Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
319
2.
Tap on the
Cruise Control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
CC to ACC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the pre-
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
320
Symbols and messages for
Adaptive Cruise Control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the adaptive cruise control (ACC
58
) can be
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
Here are some examples
59
.
The previous illustration
60
shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
The previous illustration
60
shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
58
Adaptive Cruise Control
59
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
60
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
321
Symbol Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive cruise
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Adaptive cruise
Service required
The symbol is GREY.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Adaptive Cruise Control* (p. 306)
DRIVER SUPPORT
322
Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's side markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for
use on motorways and similar major roads where
it can contribute to more comfortable driving and
a more relaxed driving experience.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects side markings
61
.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans
the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's
side markings on the road surface using the
camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
maintained with automatic speed adjustment
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and the
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
cally deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
cates active steering assis-
tance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
cates deactivated steering assistance.
61
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
323
WARNING
The Pilot Assist function is supplementary
driver support intended to facilitate driv-
ing and make it safer – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of
the lane. All other use involves increased
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles
that cannot be detected by the function.
Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, positioned cor-
rectly in the lane, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
This function can come as either Standard or
an Option depending on the market.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used to adjust
the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak-
ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This
applies in cases of large speed differences or if
the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limi-
tations of the camera and radar unit, braking may
come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the speed set
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles.
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit-
uations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
roads, or with a trailer connected to the
car.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
324
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal compo-
nents must only be performed at a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
therefore not await the steering assistance from
Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to
increase his/her own steering input, especially on
bends.
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi-
tion the car in between the lane markings and
therefore it is recommended to let the car find
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver checks
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to
turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise
control.
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
61
.
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
61
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
325
Driver display
Indication of speeds
61
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead
Current speed of your car
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Related information
Pilot Assist and Collision risk warning
(p. 325)
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if there is a
risk of collision (p. 326)
Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 327)
Managing speed for Pilot Assist (p. 328)
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist
(p. 329)
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 330)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 332)
Start overtaking assistance with Pilot Assist
(p. 332)
Limitations for overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist (p. 333)
Change the target with Pilot Assist (p. 333)
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist (p. 334)
Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 334)
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 336)
Pilot Assist and Collision risk
warning
61
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
326
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
62
.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – there-
fore a warning may not occur or be delayed.
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Head-up display for Pilot Assist if
there is a risk of collision
In cars equipped with a head up display*, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flash-
ing symbol.
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
63
.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
62
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
63
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
327
Activating and starting Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started to be able to control speed and distance
and to give steering assistance.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
With the Adaptive cruise control in standby
mode:
1.
Press the steering wheel button (6).
>
The
symbol changes to Pilot Assist
in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is
stored, which is shown with figures in the
centre of the speedometer.
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started:
Press the steering wheel button (6).
> Pilot Assist is started.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering
wheel symbol (2) has changed
from GREY to GREEN.
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
signal.
If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-
ted with the steering wheel button
.
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
DRIVER SUPPORT
328
Managing speed for Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model and market.
: Increases the stored speed
: Reduces stored speed
Stored speed
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(2):
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (3) has moved to the
desired speed.
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
329
Setting the time interval for Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter-
vals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol-
lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead.
Control for time interval
64
.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions.
For example, at low speed, when the distances
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
may be because the time window to the
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
window.
WARNING
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
the distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
64
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
330
Select one of the following options:
Eco - Pilot Assist focuses on optimal fuel
economy, which means longer time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
Supplementary information can also be found in
the sections "Managing speed for the cruise con-
trol" and "Drive mode ECO".
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speed-
ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
...or...
Press the steering wheel button (3).
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
to the Adaptive cruise control in active
mode.
WARNING
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulat-
ing both speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and
the car comes too close to a vehicle
ahead, the driver is warned of the short
distance by the Distance Warning func-
tion instead.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
331
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in
standby mode if:
the foot brake is used.
the gear selector is moved to N position.
the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute.
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen-
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering
assistance is automatically reactivated if the
lane's side markings can still be detected.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g.
stability control/anti-skid ESC
65
. If any of these
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is
switched off automatically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam-
ple:
the driver opens the door.
brake temperature is high.
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.
the parking brake is applied.
engine speed is too low/high.
the driver takes off the seatbelt.
one or more wheels lose traction.
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate Pilot Assist:
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
65
Electronic Stability Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
332
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Overtaking assistance with Pilot
Assist
Pilot Assist can help the driver when overtaking
other vehicles.
How overtaking assistance works
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
and the driver indicates the intention to overtake
by activating the direction indicator
66
, Pilot Assist
helps by accelerating the vehicle towards the
vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle rea-
ches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi-
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Start overtaking assistance with
Pilot Assist
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
ing Assistance to be activated:
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
the stored Pilot Assist speed must be high
enough for overtaking to take place safely.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
66
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
333
Limitations for overtaking
assistance with Pilot Assist
The overtaking assistance function may have lim-
ited functionality in certain situations.
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
tem, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
tions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
rarily setting Pilot Assist in the standby mode.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Change the target with Pilot Assist
In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target at
certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed.
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
mode:
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar-
get object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
DRIVER SUPPORT
334
Automatic braking with Pilot Assist
Pilot Assist has a special brake function in slow
traffic and while stationary.
Brake function in slow queues and
while stationary
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following
way:
Press the steering wheel button
.
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle
ahead if it starts moving forward within
6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disen-
gaged.
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver
must therefore intervene and brake the car him-
self/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
the parking brake is applied
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
tion
the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
the brakes have overheated
the driver switches the engine off manually.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Limitations of Pilot Assist
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi-
tion in the lane.
DRIVER SUPPORT
335
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automati-
cally deactivated - in which case, the use of
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of
such situations may be that:
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in
the event of multiple sets of markings.
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
the lane is narrow or winding.
the lane contains ridges or holes.
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet
road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark-
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact
between the car and such obstacles. The
driver must ensure him/herself that the
car is at a suitable distance from such
obstacles.
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
The recommended steering input is force
limited, which means that it cannot always
help the driver to steer and keep the car
within the lane.
Pilot Assist is switched off if the power
steering is working with reduced power -
e.g. during cooling due to overheating
(see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
336
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
Here are some examples
67
.
The previous illustration
68
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration
68
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration
68
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
67
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
68
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
337
The previous illustration
68
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Related information
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver support
systems and has the task of sensing other vehi-
cles.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
Distance Warning*
Adaptive cruise control*
Lane assistance
Pilot Assist*
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
Related information
Limitations for radar device (p. 338)
Recommended radar device maintenance
(p. 341)
Type approval for radar device (p. 342)
68
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
338
Limitations for radar device
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
69
.
The radar unit is placed inside the upper section
of the windscreen together with the car's camera
unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor-
rect function response.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov-
ered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
69
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
339
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals
or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera
and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
Vehicle speed
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles
ahead is reduced significantly if:
the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi-
cantly different from that of your own car
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between your car and the vehi-
cle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
Low trailers
Low trailer in radar shadow.
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
should therefore be particularly careful when driv-
ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
340
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Radar unit (p. 337)
DRIVER SUPPORT
341
Recommended radar device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
Radar unit (p. 337)
DRIVER SUPPORT
342
Type approval for radar device
The type approval for the car's radar units in the
ACC
70
, PA
71
and BLIS
72
functions can be read
out here.
Market
ACC
A
&
PA
B
BLIS
C
Symbol Type approval
Brazil
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar
interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
Europe
Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the
following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation.
Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz
Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP
The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151
E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
70
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
71
PA = Pilot Assist
72
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
343
Market
ACC
A
&
PA
B
BLIS
C
Symbol Type approval
The United Arab Emi-
rates (UAE)
REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
Indonesia
37295/POSTEL/2014
4927
38806/SDPPI/2015
4927
Jordan
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Korea
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
Morocco
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
344
Market
ACC
A
&
PA
B
BLIS
C
Symbol Type approval
Mexico
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299
IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0314
Moldova
Serbia
И011 14
И011 15
Singapore
South Africa
TA-2014/1824
APPROVED
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
DRIVER SUPPORT
345
Market
ACC
A
&
PA
B
BLIS
C
Symbol Type approval
Taiwan
CCAB15LP0560T3
CCAB15LP0680T0
Ukraine
Delphi і є, щ  RACAM/SRR2 ііє  П
 і  і і іі
і (іь)  (П КМ № 679 і 24 
2009 .) Ді ііі ь  і Delphi  :
Delphi.
A
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
B
PA = Pilot Assist
C
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Type approval for radio equipment
Market Symbol Type approval
Europe
Hereby, Volvo cars,
declares that all radio
equipment's are in com-
pliance with the essential
requirements and other
relevant provisions of
Directive 2014/53/EU.
Related information
Radar unit (p. 337)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
346
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver sup-
port systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
Adaptive cruise control*
Pilot Assist*
Lane assistance*
Steering assistance at risk of collision
City Safety
Driver Alert Control*
Road Sign Information*
Active main beam*
Related information
Limitations for camera unit (p. 347)
Recommended camera device maintenance
(p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
347
Limitations for camera unit
The camera unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Impaired vision
The camera has limitations similar to the human
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the
functions of camera-dependent systems could be
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig-
nificantly reduce camera function when it is used
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
73
.
The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec-
tion of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
and the message "
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", this means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles, cyclists, pedestrians and larger animals in
front of the car and that the car's camera-based
and radar-based functions may be disrupted,
reduced, completely deactivated or give an incor-
rect function response.
The following table presents examples of possi-
ble causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
73
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
348
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or
covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam-
era and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
DRIVER SUPPORT
349
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 346)
DRIVER SUPPORT
350
Recommended camera device
maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
Camera unit (p. 346)
City Safety
City Safety can alert the driver using a visual,
acoustic and brake pulse warning to help
him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger ani-
mals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car
then attempts to brake automatically unless the
driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself.
Location of the radar unit
74
.
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
of collision if the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or swerving.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce-
dure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven-
tion.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
where a collision is immediately imminent.
74
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
351
WARNING
The City Safety is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traf-
fic, weather and road conditions.
The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision
speed, but to ensure full brake perform-
ance the driver should always depress the
brake pedal – even when the car auto-
brakes.
The warning and steering assistance are
only activated if there is a high risk of col-
lision – you must therefore never wait for
a collision warning or for City Safety to
intervene.
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
City Safety does not activates any auto-
brake functions in the event of heavy
acceleration.
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City
Safety to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links for all subsections).
Related information
Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety
(p. 351)
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 353)
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 354)
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 356)
Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic
(p. 357)
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 357)
Limitations of City Safety (p. 358)
Messages for City Safety (p. 361)
Parameters and subfunctions for
City Safety
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake
function.
If the speed difference is greater than the follow-
ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by
up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
higher speeds and is most effective at speeds
above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at
lower speed.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
352
Subfunctions for City Safety
Function overview
75
.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
ing order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during
the three steps:
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani-
mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warn-
ing. There is no brake pulse warning at lower
speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
begin with light braking and then progress to full
brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
car has been braked to avoid collision with a
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
ped the car, unless the driver has managed to
depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
vention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
75
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
353
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used by the driver to
change his/her driving style - the driver must
not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do
the braking.
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
City Safety is always activated but the driver can
select the warning distance for the function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
vated. It is activated automatically when the
engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric
operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity
of the system and regulates the distance at
which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning
should be deployed.
To select warning distance:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Under
City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
If the
Early setting produces too many warnings,
which could be perceived as irritating in certain
situations, the Normal or Late warning distance
can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a
warning at a later stage.
The
Late warning distance should therefore only
be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driv-
ing.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by driv-
ing at people, animals or vehicles - this
may cause severe damage and injury and
risk lives.
City Safety warns the driver when there is
a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten
the driver’s reaction time.
Even if the warning distance has been set
to
Early warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
With the warning distance set at
Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
This may mean that the warnings come
more frequently than at the warning dis-
tance Normal, but it is recommended
since it can make City Safety more effec-
tive.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
354
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City
Safety in cross traffic" section.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
ment.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
tem cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
partially obscured cyclists.
cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor – warning and brake inter-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
355
Pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
trians with clear body outlines.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clear-
est possible information about the body outline,
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor-
mal human pattern of movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
either be detected late or not at all, which may
mean that warnings and braking are late or omit-
ted.
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Large animals
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
clear body outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
horse) must receive the clearest possible infor-
mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
ity to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
356
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
partially obscured large animals.
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
large animals that run or move quickly.
large animals if the background contrast
of the animals is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
small animals such as dogs and cats, for
example.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety can help the driver when turning and
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection.
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming
crossing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first
enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse
the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfil-
led:
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on.
WARNING
The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func-
tion is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
357
Limitations for City Safety in cross
traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
oncoming cross traffic.
Examples are:
stability control ESC intervenes in the event
of slippery driving conditions
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some-
thing
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
automatically braking the car earlier when it is
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta-
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
City Safety does not intervene with the auto-
brake function as long as the driver him/herself
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
358
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
WARNING
The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Limitations for City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
net limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC
76
will give the best possible braking force with
maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
light, reflections, when sunglasses are being
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
76
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}}}
359
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-
cles in some situations cannot be detected, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
the car. This means that the functionality of City
Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam-
era and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds -
below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there-
fore does not intervene in situations where your
car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
warning/intervention in situations where the
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
delay a collision warning and intervention in order
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
Miscellaneous
WARNING
Warnings and brake interventions could
be implemented late or not at all if a traf-
fic situation or external influences mean
that the camera and radar unit cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
or vehicles correctly.
For vehicles to be detected at night, their
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
switched on and shining clearly.
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
warning and brake intervention for large
animals is less effective at lower speeds.
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals could be dis-
engaged due to darkness or poor visibil-
ity.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
360
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h
(50 mph).
Do not place, stick or mount anything on
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
front of or around the camera and radar
unit — this can interfere with camera-
dependent functions.
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its func-
tionality, fully deactivate it or give incor-
rect function response.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
361
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
City Safety
Automatic intervention
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
City Safety (p. 350)
DRIVER SUPPORT
362
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle
approaching from behind.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is immi-
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the RCW
function detects that the car is in danger of being
hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may ten-
sion the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash
Protection System safety system.
Immediately before a collision from behind, RCW
may also activate the foot brake in order to
reduce the forward acceleration of the car during
the collision. However, the foot brake is only acti-
vated if the car is stationary. The foot brake relea-
ses immediately if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
Related information
Limitations of Rear Collision Warning
(p. 362)
Whiplash Protection System (p. 43)
Limitations of Rear Collision
Warning
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can be, for example, if:
the vehicle approaching from behind is
detected too late
the vehicle approaching from behind
changes lane at the last moment
the vehicle approaching from behind has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph)
a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected
to the car's electrical system - the RCW
function is then deactivated automatically.
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due to
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
part of the function is deactivated.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
363
BLIS*
The BLIS
77
function is intended to help the
driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to
the side of the car so as to provide assistance in
heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the
same direction.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
vehicles in the car's blind spot
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
Location of BLIS lamp
78
.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
Principle of BLIS
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica-
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
vates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
The responsibility for changing lanes
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
77
Blind Spot Information Systems
78
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
364
Related information
Activate/deactivate BLIS (p. 364)
Limitations of BLIS (p. 365)
Recommended maintenance for BLIS
(p. 365)
Messages for BLIS (p. 367)
Activate/deactivate BLIS
The BLIS
79
function can be activated/deacti-
vated.
Location of BLIS lamp
80
.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
Tap on the BLIS button in the function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
79
Blind Spot Information
80
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
365
Limitations of BLIS
The BLIS
81
function may have limitations in cer-
tain situations.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
82
.
Examples of limitations:
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.
For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
WARNING
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
Recommended maintenance for
BLIS
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
83
.
The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) and
Rear Collision Warning functions.
81
Blind Spot Information
82
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
83
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
366
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 369)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 369)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 370)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 371)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
367
Messages for BLIS
A number of messages regarding BLIS
84
can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
BLIS* (p. 363)
84
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
368
Cross Traffic Alert*
CTA
85
is a driver support that supplements
BLIS
86
and is designed to help the driver detect
traffic crossing behind the car when it is revers-
ing.
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if
reverse gear has been selected.
If CTA senses that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to
the direction from which the object
approaches.
an illuminated icon in the PAS
87
graphic on
the screen.
an icon on the Park assist camera top view.
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS
87
graphic on the
screen
88
.
WARNING
The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
The responsibility for reversing the car
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
(p. 369)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 369)
Recommended maintenance for Cross
Traffic Alert (p. 370)
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 371)
85
Cross Traffic Alert
86
Blind Spot Information
87
Park Assist System: Parking assistance system with reversing sensors
88
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
369
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
Alert
The driver can choose to switch off the CTA
89
function as follows:
Press the Cross Traffic Alert
button in the centre display
function view.
GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.
GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
CTA is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
The CTA
90
function may have limitations in cer-
tain situations.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi-
cles or obstructing obstacles.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
89
Cross Traffic Alert
90
Cross Traffic Alert
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
370
Examples of further limitations
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
See the supplementary information in the
section "Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert".
CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
Recommended maintenance for
Cross Traffic Alert
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
91
.
The sensors for CTA are located inside each cor-
ner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the BLIS
92
and Rear Collision
Warning functions.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
91
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
92
Blind Spot Information
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
371
Messages for Cross Traffic Alert
A number of messages regarding CTA
93
can be
shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 368)
93
Cross Traffic Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
372
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
94
)
helps the driver to observe speed-related road
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car
passes them.
Examples of readable signs
95
.
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is star-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
If both a sign for motorway/dual carriageway and
a sign for the speed limit are passed at the same
time, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's
speed scale.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation.
WARNING
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
Activating/deactivating Road Sign Informa-
tion (p. 373)
Road Sign Information and sign display
(p. 373)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation (p. 375)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 375)
Activating/deactivating Speed warning in
Road Sign Information (p. 376)
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information (p. 377)
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 377)
94
Road Sign Information
95
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
373
Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
- the driver can select On or Off.
Press the
Road Sign
Information button in the cen-
tre display function view.
GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
NOTE
If the Automatic Speed Limiter function is
activated, road sign information is shown
in the driver display even if RSI is not
activated.
To remove road sign information from the
driver display, you must deactivate both
Automatic Speed Limiter and RSI.
When the Automatic Speed Limiter func-
tion is activated but RSI is deactivated, no
warnings are given from RSI. In this situa-
tion, settings for RSI cannot be adjusted
either - to be able to adjust settings as
well as receive warnings, RSI must be
activated.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Road Sign Information and sign
display
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
96
) reg-
isters and shows road signs in different ways
depending on the sign and the situation.
Example
97
of detected speed information.
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
symbol in combination with a RED indication on
the speedometer.
An additional
97
sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
374
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign at
the roadside, the symbol for
this sign
97
flashes on and off
on the driver display as a warn-
ing.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the
Road
Sign Audio Warning function is activated - see
the heading "Activating/deactivating the acoustic
warning" in the section "Activating/deactivating
Road Sign Information".
Speed limit or end of motorway
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign"
stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at
the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis-
play.
Example of indirect speed limit sign
97
:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres-
ponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
Example of direct speed limit
sign
97
.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs
97
.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
the same road - an additional sign then indicates
the circumstances under which the different
speeds apply. The road section may be particu-
larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical sys-
tem and you pass a speed sign with the addi-
96
Road Sign Information
97
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
375
tional sign “trailer”, the indicated speed will
appear on the driver display.
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
by means of a symbol for an
additional sign below the speed
symbol. The additional symbol
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
“TIME”.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's speed
symbol
97
means that the RSI
has detected an additional sign
with supplementary information
for the current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If the warning sign
97
for
"School" or "Children at play"
is included in the satellite navi-
gator's map data
98
, the driver
display shows a sign of this
type.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Road Sign Information and Sensus
Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car-
riageway and city limit signs.
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
NOTE
In certain markets, the Road Sign Information
function (RSI) is only available in combination
with Sensus Navigation.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
related information.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
The subfunction
Speed Limit Warning for
RSI
99
is selectable - the driver can select On or
Off.
Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the
speed limit in force or the set "speed limit" is
exceeded - after the warning has been repeated
one extra time if the driver does not reduce
speed.
97
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
98
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation.
99
Road Sign Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
376
The speed warning is given by
the driver display symbol
100
showing the applicable maxi-
mum permitted speed tempo-
rarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.
Settings
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
higher speed than the signed speed.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press-
ing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
speed camera symbol.
Acoustic warning On/Off
It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning
in connection with Speed Warning.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select/deselect
Road Sign Audio Warning
to activate/switch off the acoustic warning.
With the Road Sign Audio Warning function
activated, the driver is also warned when driving
towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Activating/deactivating Speed
warning in Road Sign Information
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti-
vated as follows:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
(see description for "selecting speed
limit" in section "Road Sign Information
with Speed warning and Settings")
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 375)
100
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
377
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information
A car equipped with RSI
101
and Sensus
Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
Speed camera information in the driver display
102
.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit with the Speed
warning function activated, a
speed warning is given when
the car approaches a speed
camera, provided that the navi-
gation map for the area in
question contains information on speed cameras.
For more information about Speed warnings in
connection with speed cameras - see section
"Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and
Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita-
tions".
NOTE
To get an acoustic warning if you exceed
the required speed, the
Speed Limit
Warning function must be activated and
the Road Sign Audio Warning sub-
function must be set to On. An acoustic
warning is then given if the car's speed
exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI
function in the driver display.
Information about speed cameras on the
navigation map is not available for all
markets/areas.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 375)
Limitations of Road Sign Information
(p. 377)
Limitations of Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information (RSI
103
) function
may have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol-
lows:
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Signs positioned high above the roadway
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
digital road maps
104
are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information
105
.
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incor-
rect speed information.
101
Road Sign Information
102
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
378
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Road Sign Information* (p. 372)
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to help make the driver aware that he
or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if
the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
A camera detects the edge markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the alignment of
the road with the driver’s steering wheel move-
ments.
When driving behaviour starts
to become inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol
in the driver display, together
with the text message
Time
for a break soon?.
If driving behaviour does not improve but
becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is
alerted by the same symbol in the driver display,
combined with an acoustic signal and the text
message
Time to take a break.
If the Rest Stop Guidance function is activated
in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable
103
Road Sign Information
104
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
105
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
DRIVER SUPPORT
379
location for a break are also shown with the
Time to take a break warning.
The warnings are repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
WARNING
The Driver Alert Control function is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as danger-
ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
Related information
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 379)
Select rest stop guidance in the event of a
warning with Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 380)
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
On/Off
To change settings in DAC:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select/deselect
Alertness Warning to acti-
vate/deactivate DAC.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 378)
DRIVER SUPPORT
380
Select rest stop guidance in the
event of a warning with Driver Alert
Control
It is possible to set whether the
Rest Stop
Guidance function should be activated/deacti-
vated.
With the guide activated, an automatic sugges-
tion for an appropriate rest area is displayed
while DAC issues a warning.
To select Rest Stop Guidance:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
.
3.
Select/deselect
Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 378)
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple:
in strong side winds
on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec-
ted despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the
driver not getting a warning from DAC.
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
Driver Alert Control (p. 378)
Lane assistance
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
106
) is
to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
in which case it goes into standby mode. The
function becomes available again when the road
is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
106
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
381
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations
107
.
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
Assist
108
activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively
steer the car back into its lane by applying a
slight torque to the steering wheel.
Warning
108
activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
NOTE
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
from Lane assistance.
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
107
The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
108
See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
382
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
Related information
Steering assistance with lane assistance
(p. 382)
Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 383)
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 383)
Select assistance option for lane assistance
(p. 383)
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 385)
Lane assistance symbols in the driver display
(p. 387)
Steering assistance with lane
assistance
For steering assistance LKA
109
to function, the
driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel.
The system monitors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol combined with a
message, which prompts the
driver to actively steer the car:
Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym-
bol is shown again, combined with a warning
sound and this message:
Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering
applied
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt
to start steering, LKA
109
is set in standby mode -
the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
109
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
383
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping
Aid
The lane assistance LKA
110
function is selecta-
ble - the driver can select On or Off.
On/Off
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the centre display
function view.
GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.
GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
Select assistance option for lane
assistance
The driver can select how LKA
111
should react if
the car leaves its lane.
1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
In the event of
Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how LKA should react:
Assist - the driver is given steering assis-
tance without a warning.
Both - the driver is given both a warning
and steering assistance.
Warning — warning to driver only.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
Limitations of Lane assistance
In certain demanding conditions Lane assis-
tance may have difficulty helping the driver cor-
rectly. In such cases it is recommended to
switch off this function.
Examples of such conditions are:
road works
winter road conditions
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
ings
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
110
Lane Keeping Aid
111
Lane Keeping Aid
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
384
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
385
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Lane assistance LKA
112
can be shown on the
driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
112
Lane Keeping Aid
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
386
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
DRIVER SUPPORT
387
Lane assistance symbols in the
driver display
Lane assistance LKA
113
is visualised by symbols
in the driver display depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Unavailable
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym-
bol are COLOURED.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv-
ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
Related information
Lane assistance (p. 380)
113
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
388
Steering assistance at risk of
collision
The
Collision avoidance assistance function
is designed to help the driver reduce the risk of
the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or col-
liding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerv-
ing.
The Collision avoidance assistance function
consists of three subfunctions:
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how much
the car should steer – the car can never take
command.
Related information
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a collision risk (p. 388)
Symbols and messages for steering assis-
tance upon risk of collision (p. 396)
Steering assistance upon risk of run-off
(p. 389)
Steering assistance level in the event of a
run-off risk (p. 389)
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of run-off risk (p. 390)
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of running off the road (p. 390)
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 391)
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
in the event of a risk of a head-on collision
(p. 392)
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of head-on collision (p. 392)
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 393)
Activating/deactivating Steering assistance
on risk of rear-end collision* (p. 394)
Limitations for steering assistance upon risk
of rear-end collision (p. 394)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision avoidance assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
ture
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
389
Steering assistance upon risk of
run-off
The subfunction's task is to help the driver
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the
road by actively steering the car back onto the
road.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto
the road and if the steering intervention is not
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also acti-
vated.
However, the function does not intervene with
either steering assistance or brake intervention if
the direction indicators are used. And if the func-
tion detects that the driver is actively driving the
car, activation of the function will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" subfunction is supplementary
driver support intended to improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
The function cannot detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the
road.
"Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Steering assistance level in the
event of a run-off risk
The function has two activation levels on inter-
vention:
Steering assistance only
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
390
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending
on the situation at the time of road run-off.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off
risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision avoidance assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
ture
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
In certain demanding conditions the function
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
function.
Examples of such conditions are:
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility
roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
ings
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
391
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is drifting into the
oncoming lane.
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane.
However, the function does not intervene with
steering assistance if the direction indicator is
used. And if the function detects that the driver is
actively driving the car, activation of the function
will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
392
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a risk of a
head-on collision
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to deactivate the function:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision avoidance assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
ture
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
In certain situations the function may have lim-
ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol-
lowing cases, for example:
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
on roads where the lane does not have clear
lane markings
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Other demanding situations can include:
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this func-
tion.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
393
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is about to leave its
own lane while an oncoming vehicle is
approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane
at the same time, the function can help the driver
to steer the car back into its own lane.
The function can even assist if the driver inten-
tionally changes lanes using direction indicators
without noticing that another vehicle is approach-
ing.
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
WARNING
The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
394
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance on risk of rear-end
collision*
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to switch it off:
1. Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision avoidance assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision avoidance assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
Steering assistance at risk of road depar-
ture
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision*
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of rear-end collision
In certain situations the function may have lim-
ited functionality and fail to intervene in the fol-
lowing cases, for example:
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph)
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Other demanding situations can include:
road works
winter road conditions
narrow roads
poor road surface
a very “sporty” driving style
poor weather with reduced visibility.
In these demanding situations, the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this func-
tion.
DRIVER SUPPORT
395
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func-
tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be
aware of - see supplementary information in the
section "Limitations for BLIS".
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
DRIVER SUPPORT
396
Symbols and messages for steering
assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the function can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Collision avoidance assistance
Automatic intervention
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Steering assistance at risk of collision
(p. 388)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
397
Park Assist*
The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the
driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indi-
cating the distance to obstacles through acous-
tic signals combined with a graphic in the centre
display.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
cles behind is also active when the car is station-
ary.
At a distance within 30 cm (1 ft) from an obsta-
cle behind or in front of the car, the tone is con-
stant and the active sensor's field closest to the
car symbol is filled.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
view's
Settings menu option.
NOTE
Acoustic warnings are only given for
objects directly on the vehicle's route.
WARNING
The Park Assist function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the
sides (p. 398)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot
(p. 399)
Limitations of Parking assistance (p. 399)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte-
nance (p. 400)
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot
(p. 401)
DRIVER SUPPORT
398
Park Assist Pilot front, rear and
along the sides
Park Assist Pilot has different parameters
depending on which part of the car is approach-
ing an obstacle.
Backwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres
( 5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft)
from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles
on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
Forwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The front parking assistance sensors are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm
(2.5 ft) in front of the car.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
399
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 397)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
Pilot
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
deactivated.
On/Off
The front and side parking assistance sensors
are activated automatically when the engine is
started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Tap on the Park Assist button in the func-
tion view.
> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
In cars equipped with a park assist camera, Park
Assist Pilot can also be activated/deactivated
from the relevant camera view.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 397)
Limitations of Parking assistance
The Parking Assistance System cannot detect
everything in all situations and may therefore
have limited functionality in some cases.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
400
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sen-
sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect-
edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the dis-
tance to an object behind the car.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 397)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
For the Park Assist Pilot function to work opti-
mally, its sensors must be cleaned regularly with
water and car shampoo.
Location of the parking sensors
114
.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 397)
114
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
401
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Park Assist* (p. 397)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
402
Park assist camera*
The park assist camera can assist the driver
when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating
obstacles with a camera image and graphics in
the centre display.
The parking assistance camera is a support func-
tion which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre dis-
play.
Example of camera view
115
.
Zoom
116
- zoom in/out
360° view* - activates/deactivates all cam-
eras
PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking
Assistance System
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
park assist line*
117
CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic
Alert
WARNING
The parking camera function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
The parking cameras have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Related information
Parking cameras' camera views (p. 403)
Park assist lines for parking camera (p. 405)
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for park-
ing camera (p. 407)
115
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
116
The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
117
Not available on all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
403
Starting the park assist camera (p. 407)
Limitations for park assist camera (p. 408)
Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 409)
Recommended parking camera maintenance
(p. 409)
Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
era (p. 410)
Parking cameras' camera views
The function can display a composite 360° view
and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view.
360° view*
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi-
mate coverage area.
The 360° view function activates all parking
cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are
shown simultaneously in the centre display, which
helps the driver to observe what is around the car
when manoeuvring at slow speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in
front of/above the front camera.
A camera symbol on the centre
display's car symbol indicates
which of the cameras is active.
If the car is also equipped with
Park Assist System* then
distance to detected obstacles
is illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see the section "Starting the Park
assist camera".
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
404
Backwards
The backwards-facing camera
118
is fitted above the reg-
istration plate.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area
behind the car. For certain models, part of the
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may appear
slightly tilted — this is normal.
Forwards
The forwards parking camera
119
is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
camera is switched off.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
The sides
The side cameras
119
are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras can show what is along each
side of the car.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
118
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
119
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
405
Park assist lines for parking camera
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of
the car in relation to its surroundings by display-
ing lines on the screen.
Example
120
of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
the driver the path the car will take - also when
the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
the car's electrical system.
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
IMPORTANT
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays
the area behind the car. Be aware of the
sides and front of the car when manoeu-
vring in reverse.
The same applies vice versa - note what
happens to the rear parts of the car when
the front camera view is selected.
Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when driving
forward or that the front sweeps against/
over something when the steering wheel
is turned when reversing.
120
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
406
Park assist lines in 360° view*
360° view with park assist lines
120
.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown
behind, in front of and at the side of the car
(depending on the direction of travel):
When driving forwards: Front lines
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direc-
tion of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar assist line*
Towbar with park assist line
120
.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
1.
Press
Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2.
Press
Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
120
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
407
Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot
for parking camera
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car
symbol
121
.
The fields for the front and reversing sensors
change colour as the distance to the obstacle
decreases — from yellow through orange to red.
Colours of front and
reversing fields
Distance in metres
(feet)
Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9)
Orange 0,4-0,6 (1,3-2,0)
Red 0-0,4 (0-1,3)
Sensor field to the sides
The side fields are only shown in orange.
Colour of side fields Distance in metres
(feet)
Orange 0-0,3 (0-1,0)
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
Starting the park assist camera
The park assist camera starts automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
one of the centre display's function buttons.
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera start
Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre dis-
play's function view.
The screen then initially shows
the last used camera view.
However, after each engine
start, the previously shown side view is replaced
by the 360° view and the previously shown
zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates auto-
matically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and not reactivated.
121
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
408
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
Limitations for park assist camera
The park assist camera cannot detect everything
in all situations and may therefore have limited
functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the cam-
era's view.
Blind sectors
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the gaps between the individual cameras.
WARNING
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, a relatively large sector
could be hidden from view. An obstacle could
thereby go undetected until the car is very
close to it.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
409
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black and
contains this symbol then it
means that the camera is out
of order.
The following illustration shows
an example.
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol-
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
open door
open tailgate
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
Recommended parking camera
maintenance
The parking cameras positioned beside the rear
number plate holder, in the grille and in both
door mirrors need a certain amount of mainte-
nance.
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
410
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Park assist camera* (p. 402)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
411
Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
122
) helps the driver to
park in or leave a parking space.
PAP first checks if a space is large enough and if
so steers the car into the space.
The centre display indicates with symbols, graph-
ics and text the various operations to be carried
out and when to do so.
WARNING
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Related information
Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 411)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot (p. 412)
Leaving a car park with Park Assist Pilot
(p. 415)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 416)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot mainte-
nance (p. 417)
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 418)
Parking variants with Park Assist
Pilot
Park Assist Pilot PAP
123
can be used for the fol-
lowing different parking situations.
122
Park Assist Pilot
123
Park Assist Pilot
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
412
Parallel parking
The principal of parallel parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
Using the
Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park-
ing space" in the section "Parking with Park
Assist Pilot".
Perpendicular parking
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
forward/backward.
NOTE
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis-
ted by the PAP
Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be
used for a parallel-parked car.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
124
) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
keep a close watch around the car
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
control and maintain a safe speed
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the cen-
tre display's screen when the different steps are
to be performed.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
No trailer is attached to the car
Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
124
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
413
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
Parking
PAP parks the car using the following steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear.
Finding and measuring parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function
view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
Principle for parallel parking.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
Proceed as follows:
1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
perpendicular parking.
2.
Tap on the
Park In button in the function
view or in the camera view.
> PAP searches for a parking space and
checks whether it is big enough.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
senger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
414
Reversing in to the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Perform the following to reverse the car into the
parking space:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Positioning the car in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
415
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back-
wards.
4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
Leaving a car park with Park Assist
Pilot
The function
Park Out can also help the driver
to leave a parking space.
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out
function must only be used for a parallel-
parked car - it does not work for a perpendic-
ular-parked car.
The Park Out function is acti-
vated in the centre display's
function view or in the camera
view.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Tap on the
Park Out button in the function
view or in the camera view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display - follow the instructions in the same
way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking
space.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
parking space without any extra manoeuvring
then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
parking space.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
416
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot PAP
125
function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may there-
fore have limited functionality.
WARNING
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic dur-
ing the parking manoeuvre.
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when cal-
culating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause PAP to swing into the park-
ing space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
if the driver moves the steering wheel
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
if the driver presses
Cancel in the centre
display
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road
when the power steering works at reduced
power - e.g. during cooling due to overheat-
ing (see section "Speed-dependent steering
force").
Where applicable, a message in the centre dis-
play states the reason for a parking sequence
being discontinued.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent meas-
urement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
The driver must therefore be prepared to inter-
rupt a parking step.
125
Park Assist Pilot
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
417
There are also a few details to bear in mind while
parking, e.g.:
The driver is always responsible for determin-
ing whether the space selected by PAP is
suitable for parking.
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
from the car.
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
During the search and check-measurement
of the parking space, PAP may miss objects
positioned deep in the parking space.
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
Use approved tyres
126
with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
already parked nearby - if they are inap-
propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb.
Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
potential parking spaces when PAP meas-
ures the space.
IMPORTANT
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 284)
Recommended Park Assist Pilot
maintenance
For the Park Assist Pilot PAP
127
function to work
optimally, the parking assistance sensors must
be cleaned regularly with water and car sham-
poo.
Location of the parking sensors
128
.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
126
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
418
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot PAP
129
can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre dis-
play.
The following table shows examples.
Message Specification
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 411)
127
Park Assist Pilot
128
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
129
Park Assist Pilot
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
420
Starting the car
The car is started using the start knob in the tun-
nel console when the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
Fasten the seatbelt.
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir-
rors.
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With the option for
keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key
can be anywhere in the car.
2. Hold the brake pedal depressed
1
fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
that the gear lever is in neutral position or
that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and then
release it. The control automatically returns
to its starting position.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight
delay before starting is initiated.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
If the Car key not found message is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key by the backup reader. Then try to start
the car again.
NOTE
When the remote control key is positioned by
the backup reader, make sure that there are
no car keys, metal objects or electronic appa-
ratus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile
phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several
car keys close to one another by the backup
reader may cause interference with each
other.
1
If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
421
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
tery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
Switching off the car (p. 421)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 423)
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the start knob in
the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
Turn the start knob clockwise and release it -
the car is switched off. The control automati-
cally returns to its starting position.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
car is switched off.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 420)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
422
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 423)
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the differ-
ent functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual.
The following table shows the functions available
in each ignition position/level:
Level Functions
0
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated
A
.
The power seats* can be adjusted.
The power windows can be used.
The centre display is started and
can be used
A
.
The infotainment system can be
used
A
.
The functions are time-controlled in
this ignition position and are switched
off automatically after a period of time.
I
Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger com-
partment, Bluetooth, navigation,
phone, ventilation fan and wind-
screen wipers can be used.
Power seats can be adjusted.
12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
STARTING AND DRIVING
423
Level Functions
II
The headlamps come on.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the car has
been started.
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery and
should therefore be avoided!
A
Also activated when the door is opened.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 420)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 423)
Selecting ignition mode
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the differ-
ent functions available.
Selecting ignition position
Start knob in the tunnel console.
Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
Ignition position I - Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control auto-
matically returns to its starting position.
Ignition position II - Turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it in position for
approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
Back to ignition position 0 - To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II -
Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control automatically returns to its star-
ting position.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 420)
Switching off the car (p. 421)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
424
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter-
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
main display. For information about a specific
alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual
from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Related information
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 424)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 425)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or the
alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep-
arate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by
pressing the right arrow button on the steer-
ing wheel's right-hand keypad and then on
the O button.
If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing
the O button.
The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can
be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service
is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
lation.
Related information
Alcohol lock* (p. 424)
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 425)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
425
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
rect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 424)
Alcohol lock* (p. 424)
Starting the car (p. 420)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed
or prevent the car from rolling.
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car
is equipped with several automatic brake assist
functions. These can assist the driver by not
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following
auto braking functions are available:
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
Hold)
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
Auto braking after a collision
City Safety
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)
Related information
Foot brake (p. 425)
Parking brake (p. 428)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Auto braking after a collision (p. 433)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 432)
City Safety (p. 350)
Hill descent control (p. 454)
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
ing effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes should be relieved by using
engine braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine
braking is most efficiently used if the same gear
is used downhill as up. Use drive mode Off Road
for increased engine braking while driving on
steep downhill gradients at low speeds.
Anti-lock braking system
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels
from locking while braking and allows maintained
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
426
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
mal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
ically after the car has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
matic test of the system may be made at low
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
has occurred in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake
system checked - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
Related information
Brake assistance (p. 426)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 432)
Braking on wet roads (p. 427)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 427)
Brake system maintenance (p. 427)
Brake lights (p. 158)
Brake assistance
The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
System), helps to increase brake force during
braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where neces-
sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
function is suspended when the pressure on the
brake pedal decreases.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
427
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time in
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect
may be delayed slightly when next using the
brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 425)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 427)
Braking on gritted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings.
This may extend braking distance. You should
therefore maintain a greater safety distance to
vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do
the following:
Brake now and again to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
Gently depress the brake pedal after finish-
ing driving and before starting your next trip.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 425)
Braking on wet roads (p. 427)
Brake system maintenance
Check brake system components regularly for
wear.
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and
replaced brake linings and brake discs do not
provide optimal braking effect until they have
been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres
(miles). Compensate for the reduced braking
effect by depressing the brake pedal harder.
Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that
are approved for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Related information
Foot brake (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
428
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 428)
Parking on a hill (p. 430)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 430)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Activating and deactivating the
parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Activating the parking brake
1. Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the parking brake is activated.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
parking brake is activated.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage in the driver display.
STARTING AND DRIVING
429
Automatic activation
The parking brake is activated automatically:
if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for a longer time (5-10
minutes).
when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill
2
.
when the car is switched off and the setting
for automatic activation of the parking brake
is activated in the centre display.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be acti-
vated when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
Deactivating the parking brake
Deactivate manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
Deactivate automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Start the car.
4. With automatic gearbox:
Select gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With manual gearbox:
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
NOTE
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without
the seatbelt fastened.
Related information
Automatic parking brake activation setting
(p. 430)
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 430)
Parking brake (p. 428)
Parking on a hill (p. 430)
2
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
430
Automatic parking brake activation
setting
Choose whether the parking brake is to be acti-
vated automatically when the car is switched off.
This choice is made in the settings menu in the
centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
to select or deselect the func-
tion
Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 428)
Parking brake (p. 428)
Parking on a hill
Always use the parking brake when parking on a
hill.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by pulling the control upwards while driving
the car away. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 428)
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
possible to deactivate or activate the parking
brake after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
with the parking brake applied.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in
position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
manual gearbox.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con-
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
STARTING AND DRIVING
431
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the mes-
sage in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver dis-
play.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the parking brake
(p. 428)
Starter battery (p. 611)
Volvo service programme (p. 590)
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti-
vated automatically. The function can use either
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta-
tionary and it works on all gradients. When driving
away, the brakes disengage automatically if the
driver is wearing the seatbelt.
NOTE
When braking to a standstill on an uphill or
downhill slope, the brake pedal should be
depressed a little harder before being
released to ensure the car does not roll.
The parking brake is activated if:
the car is switched off
the driver's door is opened
the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled
the car has been stationary for a longer time
(5-10 minutes).
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the parking brake to
keep the car stationary.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the automatic
brake at a standstill (p. 432)
Foot brake (p. 425)
Parking brake (p. 428)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 432)
STARTING AND DRIVING
432
Activating and deactivating the
automatic brake at a standstill
The automatic brake function at a standstill is
activated using the button in the tunnel console.
Press the button in the tunnel console to
activate or deactivate the function.
> The indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated. Activated
function remains even when the car is
started next time.
Applicable when switching off
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
The function remains deactivated until it is
reactivated.
When the function is deactivated, hill start
assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the
car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient.
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Help when starting on a hill
Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
the car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
vents the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
eral seconds or when the driver starts to drive
away.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
Related information
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Foot brake (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
433
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten-
sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat-
ically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli-
sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated auto-
matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti-
vated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision
Warning and Blind Spot Information safety sys-
tems.
Related information
Rear Collision Warning (p. 362)
BLIS* (p. 363)
Brake functions (p. 425)
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and drive
wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
the gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
automatic.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto-
matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
changes means that the engine's torque and
power range can be used effectively. In the auto-
matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually with
the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
rently in use.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
ponents, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown -
follow the recommendation given.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
434
Symbols in the driver display
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message.
Symbol Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommenda-
tion given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow
the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Acceler-
ation performance reduced
In the event of a temporary power-
train fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Manual gearbox (p. 434)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 439)
Manual gearbox
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit-
able gear manually, according to speed and
power requirements at the time.
Changing gear
Neutral position (N)
The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
Follow the gearing pattern on the gear lever
and start from neutral position, N, before
moving it to the R position.
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
During parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information
Gearbox (p. 433)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 439)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
435
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
The driver display shows the gear position
selected:
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
also shown.
Gear positions
Park position - P
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the
P
position is engaged.
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be sta-
tionary when the park position is selected.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
park position, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the ignition position must be II.
To park - first apply the parking bake and then
select park position.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
tionary when reverse position is selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to change from the neutral position to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when changing gear from R position to
D position.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
436
Manual gearshift mode - M
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the
gear selector sideways from position D to the
end position at "±". The driver display shows
which gear is engaged at the time.
Press the gear selector forwards to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
Press the gear selector backwards to ""
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
manual gearshift mode in the driver display
3
.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri-
ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking
and stalling.
To return to automatic gear changing, press the
gear selector sideways to the end position at D.
Related information
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 438)
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 436)
Kick-down function (p. 439)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 439)
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates cur-
rent gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles.
3
The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
437
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Switch
To change gear one step:
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Manual deactivation in gear position D.
Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
This is indicated by means of the figure for the
current gear extinguishing. The exception is dur-
ing engine braking - then the paddles are acti-
vated for as long as engine braking is in pro-
gress.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva-
tion.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 439)
STARTING AND DRIVING
438
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental
changing between different gear positions in an
automatic gearbox.
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
itor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special
safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Deactivate automatic gear selector inhibitor
(p. 438)
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If there is no power to the car, the automatic
gear selector inhibitor can nevertheless be dis-
engaged.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-
charged battery, the gear selector must be
moved to the N position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
the compartment.
Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
hold.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
439
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the button.
4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
Related information
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 438)
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Kick-down function
Kick-down
4
is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
On kick-down the car can shift down one or more
steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The
car shifts up when the engine has reached is
maximum engine speed in order to prevent
engine damage.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Gear shift indicator*
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
gear in good time.
4
Only possible with automatic gearbox.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
440
With automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi-
cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom-
mended.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
With manual gearbox
An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to
a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended
change to a lower gear.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
Related information
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 435)
Manual gearbox (p. 434)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
441
All-wheel drive
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time, which improves traction.
To achieve the best possible traction, the motive
force is distributed automatically to the wheels
with the best grip. The system continuously cal-
culates the need for torque to the rear wheels,
and can immediately redistribute up to half of the
motor's torque to the rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum trac-
tion during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode*.
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Low speed control (p. 453)
Gearbox (p. 433)
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situa-
tions.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
Steering
Engine/gearbox
5
/all-wheel drive
Brakes
Shock absorption
Driver display
Start/Stop function
Climate settings
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
This is the car's normal mode.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set-
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for car-
bon dioxide emissions.
ECO
Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving with the
Eco mode.
The drive mode means, for example, that the
Start/Stop function is activated and the output of
certain climate settings is reduced.
The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili-
tates fuel-efficient driving.
5
Applies to automatic gearbox.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
442
OFF ROAD
Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads.
The steering is light, the all-wheel drive operation
and low speed function with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off
road mode is suspended and another drive mode
is activated.
In the Off road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachom-
eter.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
DYNAMIC
Dynamic mode means that the car has sport-
ier characteristics and faster response to
accelerating.
The gear changes become faster and more dis-
tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
Steering response is faster and shock absorption
is harder
6
which means that the body follows the
roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
INDIVIDUAL
Adapting a drive mode according to individ-
ual preferences.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving cha-
racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi-
vidual driver profile.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
Settings view
7
for individual drive mode.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select
Individual Drive Mode.
6
Applies to Four-C.
7
The figure is schematic - details may vary depending on car model or updated software.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
443
3.
In
Presets, select a drive mode to start from:
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
Driver Display
Steering force
Powertrain Characteristics
Brake Characteristics
Suspension Control
ECO Climate
Start/Stop.
Related information
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Drive mode ECO (p. 444)
Economical driving (p. 456)
Start/Stop function (p. 446)
Low speed control (p. 453)
Hill descent control (p. 454)
All-wheel drive (p. 441)
Changing drive mode*
Change the drive mode using the control in the
centre console.
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
To change drive mode:
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
If a drive mode is greyed-out in the pop-up menu
then it cannot be selected.
Related information
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 446)
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving
using a function button (p. 454)
Activating and deactivating hill descent con-
trol with the function button (p. 455)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
444
Drive mode ECO
Drive mode Eco optimises the car's driving cha-
racteristics for more fuel efficient and environ-
mentally-conscious driving.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ-
ment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv-
ing:
Gearbox gearshift points
8
.
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
The Eco Coast
8
freewheel function is acti-
vated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
Some of the climate control system's set-
tings work at reduced power or are deacti-
vated.
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-
conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast
8
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac-
tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
reduced to idling speed with reduced consump-
tion.
The function is best used where it is possible to
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
lower speed limit.
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
Drive mode Eco is activated.
The gear selector is in D position.
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
The driver display shows COASTING when the
freewheel function is being used.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
The gear selector is moved from the D posi-
tion and the manual position.
The speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%.
Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*.
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti-
vate or switch off the function in order to use
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
able to do it in the safest way possible.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
Move the gear selector to manual position.
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
Change drive mode*, or switch off the Eco
drive mode in the function view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel func-
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer
distances.
8
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
445
Cruise control Eco Cruise
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will
be lower compared to other drive modes, which
enables further fuel savings. This means that the
car's speed can be slightly above or below the
set speed.
On a smooth road, the car's speed can devi-
ate from the set speed when the cruise con-
trol is active and the car free-rolls.
On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made
8
, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
achieve the set speed.
On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
the car's speed can be slightly above or
below the set speed. The function uses nor-
mal engine braking to maintain the set
speed. The foot brake is also used if neces-
sary.
Eco gauge in the driver display
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
driving is:
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car under
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
the short pointer on the gauge.
Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*.
Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, Eco climate control is acti-
vated automatically in the passenger compart-
ment in order to reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
tings can be reset manually, but full function-
ality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting
Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press
the button for max. defroster which has normal
functionality.
Related information
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Activating and deactivating drive mode ECO
with the function button (p. 446)
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Economical driving (p. 456)
Start/Stop function (p. 446)
8
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
446
Activating and deactivating drive
mode ECO with the function button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
control in the tunnel console has a function but-
ton for Eco drive mode in the centre display
function view.
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, and it must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. The driver
display shows ECO when the function is acti-
vated.
Selecting Eco drive mode in the centre
display function view
Press the Driving Mode ECO button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Related information
Drive mode ECO (p. 444)
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Start/Stop function
With the Start/Stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has stop-
ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed.
The start/stop function reduces fuel consump-
tion, which in turn contributes to reduced exhaust
emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an envi-
ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information
Driving with start/stop function (p. 446)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 448)
Drive modes* (p. 441)
Driving with start/stop function
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
the engine when stationary and then restarts it
automatically when the journey is resumed.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
engine is started and can be activated if certain
conditions have been met. The driver display indi-
cates whether the function is available, active or
not available.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli-
mate control system's fan speed or extremely
high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to auto-
stop:
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
447
With automatic gearbox
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
With manual gearbox
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi-
tion and release the clutch pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
In drive mode Eco or Comfort
9
, the engine may
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist acti-
vated, the engine will auto-stop after approxi-
mately three seconds.
Autostart
The following is required for the engine to auto-
start:
With automatic gearbox
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling
backwards.
When the Auto Hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
When adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist
is activated, the engine will auto-start when
the accelerator pedal is depressed, or by
pressing the
button on the left keypad
of the steering wheel.
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
With manual gearbox
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Symbols in the driver display
With 12-inch driver display*
The text READY is shown in the tachometer
when the function is available.
A pointer in the tachometer points to READY
when the function is active and the engine is
auto-stopped.
The text READY is greyed out when the
function is not available.
No text is shown when the function is deacti-
vated.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
9
Normal start mode.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
448
With 8-inch driver display
The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the
speedometer.
Symbol Specification
White symbol: The function is avail-
able.
Beige symbol: The function is
active and the engine is auto-stop-
ped.
The function is not available, the
conditions are not fulfilled.
No symbol is shown when the
function is deactivated.
Related information
Deactivating the Start/Stop function tempo-
rarily (p. 448)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 448)
Start/Stop function (p. 446)
Help when starting on a hill (p. 432)
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 431)
Deactivating the Start/Stop function
temporarily
In certain situations it may be desirable to tem-
porarily deactivate the start/stop function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is
switched off when the function
is deactivated.
The function is deactivated until
it is reactivated
the drive mode is changed to Eco or Comfort
the next time the car is started.
Related information
Driving with start/stop function (p. 446)
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 448)
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the driver display.
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
The engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
The ambient temperature is under -5 °C (23
°F) or above approx. 30 °C (86 °F).
the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
the car is reversed.
The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
449
The driver makes sweeping steering wheel
movements.
The road is very steep.
The bonnet is opened.
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating tempera-
ture.
The ABS system has been activated.
In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated).
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
The exhaust system's particulate filter is
full
10
.
A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
The gearbox is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
The gear selector is in M (±) position.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not auto-
start after having auto-stopped:
With automatic gearbox:
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
P position and the driver's door is open - a
normal start must take place.
With manual gearbox:
The driver is unrestrained.
A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
as follows:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. A message is shown in the
driver display - follow the recommendation
given.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
High humidity in the passenger compartment
forms misting on the windows.
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
The bonnet is opened.
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
The gear selector is moved from D to R or M
(±) position.
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
10
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
450
Related information
Start/Stop function (p. 446)
Driving with start/stop function (p. 446)
Deactivating the Start/Stop function tempo-
rarily (p. 448)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
451
Level control* and shock absorption
Level control and shock absorption are regula-
ted automatically in the car.
With rear level control, the car maintains the
same height at the rear regardless of load. Level
control can also occur even after the car has
been parked.
Shock absorption(Four-C)
The shock absorption is adapted according to the
selected drive mode and according to the speed
of the car. Shock absorption is normally set for
the best possible comfort and is regulated con-
tinuously depending on the road surface, the
car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
During transport
During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the air suspension may occur during
transport, which could affect the lashing nega-
tively.
Symbols and messages in driver display
Symbol Message Specification
Suspension
Deactivated by user
Level control has been switched off manually by the user.
Suspension
Temporarily reduced performence
Level control performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this
message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Service required
A fault has occurred. Visit a workshop
A
as soon as possible.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
452
Symbol Message Specification
Suspension failure
Stop safely
A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car towed to a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Slow down Car too high
A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshop
A
.
Suspension
Auto adjusting car level
Level control of the car's rear axle to target height in progress.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Settings for level control* (p. 453)
Drive modes* (p. 441)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
453
Settings for level control*
Switch off level control when the car is to be
jacked up in order to prevent problems with
automatic regulation.
Settings in the centre display
Disable Leveling Control
In certain cases, the function must be deacti-
vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*.
The difference in level created when lifting with a
jack would otherwise mean the air suspension
starting to adjust the height, creating an unde-
sired effect.
Deactivating the function via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Related information
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 451)
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Low speed control
The low speed control function Low Speed
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel-
spin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
to facilitate traction and speed control at low
speed.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) which means that speed
down steep hills can be controlled with the accel-
erator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake
pedal. The system facilitates a low and even
speed while driving on steep downhill gradients.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
Activating and deactivating low-speed driving
using a function button (p. 454)
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Hill descent control (p. 454)
All-wheel drive (p. 441)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
454
Activating and deactivating low-
speed driving using a function
button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
control in the tunnel console has a function but-
ton for low-speed driving with
Hill Descent
Control in the centre display function view.
Select low-speed driving in the centre
display function view
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
Low speed control (p. 453)
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Hill descent control
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced
engine braking. The function makes it possible
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv-
ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Function
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward, assis-
ted by the brake system. The speed can be
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
455
the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are
switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed,
or stop the car at any time by using the foot
brake.
The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and
improves traction for driving off-road and on slip-
pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Points to remember when driving with
HDC
If the function is disabled while driving on a
steep downhill gradient, the braking effect
will gradually decrease.
With automatic gearbox
HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
gears even though the function is not deacti-
vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
Activating and deactivating hill descent con-
trol with the function button (p. 455)
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Low speed control (p. 453)
All-wheel drive (p. 441)
Activating and deactivating hill
descent control with the function
button
Any car that is not equipped with a drive mode
control in the tunnel console has a function but-
ton for hill descent control with
Hill Descent
Control in the centre display function view.
Selecting hill descent control in the
centre display function view
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
Press the Hill Descent Control button to
activate or deactivate the function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
This function is disabled automatically when the
engine is switched off.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
456
Related information
Hill descent control (p. 454)
Changing drive mode* (p. 443)
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
tions.
For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
Use the Eco Coast freewheel function in Eco
drive mode - engine braking ceases, mean-
ing that the car's kinetic energy is used to
freewheel for longer distances.
Drive in the highest gear
11
possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con-
sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
mise braking.
High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a retailer.
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
Avoid driving with open windows.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Related information
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28)
Drive mode ECO (p. 444)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
11
Applies to driving with manual gear changing.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
457
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that:
the engine is working normally and that fuel
consumption is normal
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
brake force during braking is optimal
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
if the car is heavily laden
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv-
ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or
icy road surfaces.
starter battery charging is good
the wiper blades are in good condition
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 663)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Winter driving (p. 457)
Economical driving (p. 456)
Settings for car modem (p. 529)
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Pilot Assist (p. 322)
Speed Limiter (p. 290)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform cer-
tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
This mixture protects the engine against
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
health risks, different types of glycol must not
be mixed.
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con-
sumption while the engine is cold.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
458
Slippery driving conditions
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
Winter wheels (p. 563)
Snow chains (p. 564)
Braking on gritted roads (p. 427)
Braking on wet roads (p. 427)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Starter battery (p. 611)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Topping up coolant (p. 602)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 659)
Driving in water
Driving in water means that the car is driven in a
deeper amount of water on a road that is under
water. Driving in water must be performed with
great caution.
The car can be driven through water to a maxi-
mum depth of 30 cm (11.8 inches) at no more
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec-
tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
which shortens the service life of related
systems.
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flood-
ing, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is
not covered by the warranty.
In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car from
the water to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
engine breakdown.
Related information
Recovery (p. 483)
Low speed control (p. 453)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
459
Opening and closing the fuel filler
flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap
to be opened
12
.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indi-
cates which side of the car the
fuel filler flap is located.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Related information
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 466)
Filling fuel
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
Refuelling the car at a petrol station
Fuel filling is performed in the following way.
1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier
13
on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. See information
on approved fuels and the identifier in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec-
tively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open-
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Topping up fuel from a fuel can
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located in the foam block under the floor hatch in
the cargo area.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
Applies to cars with fuel-driven heater*
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area.
12
Only locking and unlocking with the remote control key, keyless or via Volvo On Call affects the status of the fuel filler flap.
13
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the
end of 2018 at the latest.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
460
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
Opening and closing the fuel filler flap
(p. 459)
Petrol (p. 461)
Diesel (p. 462)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 463)
Handling of fuel
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
cal attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe-
thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten-
tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni-
ted.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
Related information
Petrol (p. 461)
Diesel (p. 462)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 465)
STARTING AND DRIVING
461
Petrol
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand-
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat-
est.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
IMPORTANT
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by
volume ethanol) is approved for use.
Ethanol higher than E10
(max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is
not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
An octane rating lower than RON 95 must
not be used.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100
°F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recom-
mended for optimum performance and fuel econ-
omy.
IMPORTANT
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
Handling of fuel (p. 460)
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Petrol particle filter (p. 462)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 663)
STARTING AND DRIVING
462
Petrol particle filter
Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In
normal driving conditions, passive regeneration
takes place, which leads to the particles being
oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in
this way.
If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated
cold starts in low outside temperature, active
regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of
the particulate filter is automatic and normally
takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of
burning during regeneration.
Use the parking heater in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a petrol car
The capacity of the petrol emission control sys-
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the petrol
emission control system to regenerate.
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
Petrol (p. 461)
Diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
phur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand-
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat-
est.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C (32 °F)) a
paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to starting problems. The fuel
qualities that are sold must be adapted for sea-
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
463
son and climate zone, but for extreme weather
conditions, old fuel or moving between climate
zones, paraffin precipitate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME
14
(B7).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
Special additives
Marine diesel fuel
Heating oil
FAME
15
and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Related information
Handling of fuel (p. 460)
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 463)
Diesel particulate filter (p. 464)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 465)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 663)
Empty tank and diesel engine
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check.
Before starting the car after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2.
Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. Start the engine.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
14
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
15
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
464
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has two opening
caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past
both caps before filling can be started.
Related information
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Diesel (p. 462)
Tool kit (p. 557)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel cars are fitted with particle filters for more
efficient emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
When these conditions have been met, regenera-
tion starts to burn off the particles and empty the
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have
reached normal operating temperature. Regener-
ation of the particulate filter is automatic and nor-
mally takes 10-20 minutes.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily
a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a diesel car
The capacity of the diesel emission control sys-
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
emission control system to regenerate.
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuelling.
Related information
Diesel (p. 462)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 465)
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 663)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
465
Emission control with AdBlue®
16
AdBlue is an additive used in the SCR
17
system
to reduce emissions of noxious substances from
a diesel engine.
In the SCR system, the AdBlue and the nitrous
oxide exhaust gas substance are converted to
nitrogen and water vapour, which significantly
reduces the emissions of harmful nitrous oxides.
AdBlue
AdBlue is a colourless fluid that consists of
32.5% urea
18
in deionised water and is produced
in accordance with the ISO 22241 standard. It is
specially developed for SCR cleaning technology
for diesel engines.
AdBlue has its own tank in the car and is topped
up via a separate filler pipe behind the fuel filler
flap. Consumption depends on driving style, out-
side temperature and the operating temperature
of the system.
Conditions for driving with AdBlue
There must always be AdBlue of the correct
quality in the tank before the car can be started.
The SCR system is very sensitive to contami-
nants.
The emission control system continuously moni-
tors the tank level, quality and dosage of AdBlue.
If something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
IMPORTANT
AdBlue is required for the function of the
SCR system and legal emissions compliance.
It is illegal to modify or manipulate the AdBlue
supply system in any way so that no AdBlue
reagent is consumed when it is required for
legal exhaust emissions compliance. Any
such tampering may be a criminal offence
which may lead to legal prosecution actions.
It is not permitted to operate the car with an
empty AdBlue tank, since it will no longer be
compliant with the legal requirements for
exhaust emissions. Therefore, the car is
equipped with a warning system to inform
when AdBlue refilling is required. When the
fill level in the AdBlue tank is getting low,
warnings are displayed to inform that AdBlue
refilling is needed.
Related information
Handling AdBlue® (p. 465)
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 466)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 468)
Handling AdBlue®
AdBlue consists primarily of water (approx.
67.5% water and 32.5% urea). The fluid is not
flammable but should be handled with care
since it can irritate the eyes and skin.
Points to remember when handling
Avoid inhaling vapour as well as contact with skin
and eyes. Preferably use gloves that prevent irri-
tation to sensitive skin when handling the fluid.
WARNING
Action for first aid:
For inhalation - get fresh air.
For skin contact - wash the skin with
soap and water.
For contact with the eyes - rinse immedi-
ately with a lot of water.
For ingestion - rinse the mouth thor-
oughly. Do not induce vomiting.
Seek medical attention if the discomfort
remains or if a large quantity has been inges-
ted.
Action in the event of a spill
AdBlue spilled on the ground, the car or painted
surfaces must be rinsed thoroughly with water.
Avoid releasing into the drainage system.
16
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
17
Selective Catalytic Reduction
18
CO(NH
2
)
2
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
466
Storage
AdBlue must be stored in tightly sealed original
packaging at a temperature above -11 °C (12 °F)
and below 30 °C (86 °F). The fluid must not be
stored in direct sunlight.
AdBlue freezes at -11 °C (12 °F) but can be
used again when the solution has thawed.
Related information
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 466)
Emission control with AdBlue® (p. 465)
Checking and filling with AdBlue®
Check the AdBlue level regularly and top up if
the message for low AdBlue level is shown in
the driver display.
The Volvo workshop tops up AdBlue when the
car is serviced, however, it must also be topped
up several times between services depending on
driving style. If the AdBlue tank is allowed to
drain completely then it will no longer be possible
to start the car.
NOTE
Never run the AdBlue tank dry. Fill the tank in
good time before it is empty.
If the tank is run dry, it will not be possible to
start the engine after it is switched off – not
the regular way or using aids.
The only way to restart the car after the tank
has been run dry is to refill with AdBlue of the
specified quality, minimum 3 litres.
Checking AdBlue level
1.
Open the Car status app in the app view.
STARTING AND DRIVING
467
2.
Press Status to show the AdBlue level.
Graphic for AdBlue level in the centre display.
Each cursor represents approx. 25% of a full
tank.
When less than 25 % of the tank remains
available, the colour of the remaining cursor
changes to amber, and at less than 10 % it
turns red.
Filling
When the AdBlue level starts to
become low, a symbol illuminates in
the driver display and the
AdBlue
level low message is shown.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2.
Open the blue cover for the smaller filler pipe
intended for AdBlue.
3. Fill with AdBlue of the correct quality
19
.
Do not overfill the tank.
WARNING
When filling from the AdBlue pump at a filling
station, it is advisable to use the pump adap-
ted for passenger cars. The AdBlue pump for
heavy vehicles can also be used.
IMPORTANT
Exercise caution to prevent AdBlue from
coming into contact with the car's paintwork.
If it does, rinse with plenty of water since the
fluid can affect the paintwork.
Related information
Handling AdBlue
®
(p. 465)
Symbols and messages for AdBlue®
(p. 468)
Tank capacity for AdBlue
®
(p. 661)
19
ISO 22241
STARTING AND DRIVING
468
Symbols and messages for
AdBlue®
The emission control system continuously moni-
tors the level, quality and dosage of AdBlue. If
something is wrong, a message is shown in the
driver display.
Symbol Message Specification
AdBlue level low
The AdBlue level is low and the tank needs to be topped up.
AdBlue dosing
and
AdBlue quality
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function.
STARTING AND DRIVING
469
Symbol Message Specification
Refill AdBlue
The AdBlue level is critically low and the tank needs to be topped up immediately.
Engine start prohibit.
and e.g.: Fill a minimum of 4
litres of AdBlue
The car cannot be started before AdBlue has been filled. Fill with AdBlue to the amount specified in
the driver display, or contact a workshop
A
.
Note that:
The car must be level for the level gauge to be able to correctly register the amount of AdBlue
filled.
It can take up to 20 seconds after filling before the system has been updated with the correct
level indication.
Engine start prohibited
Service of AdBlue system
needed to allow restart
The system does not function as it should. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 466)
Handling AdBlue® (p. 465)
Book service and repair (p. 592)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
470
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Under special conditions, for example hard driv-
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat -
in particular with a heavy load.
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message
Engine temperature
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
down.
If the message
Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected
20
. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the rec-
ommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation given.
Related information
Topping up coolant (p. 602)
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Preparations for a long trip (p. 457)
Gear shift indicator* (p. 439)
20
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
471
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni-
tion position II when the car is switched off.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is
shown in the driver display. The energy-saving
function then shuts down certain functions or
reduces certain functions such as the ventilation
fan and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 611)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be started with current from another battery.
Attachment points for the jump leads.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
(2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's negative jump-starting point
(4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
472
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's
clamps comes into contact with the car's
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's
positive terminal or the clamp connected to
the red jump lead.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Never smoke near the battery.
Related information
Starting the car (p. 420)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 194)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 423)
Towbar*
The car can be equipped with a towbar that
makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the
car.
There may be different towbar variants available
for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more infor-
mation.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
473
Related information
Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 474)
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 479)
Specifications for towbar* (p. 473)
Specifications for towbar*
Dimensions and mounting points for towbar.
Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches)
A 1204,1 (47,4)
B 80,5 (3,2)
C 875 (34,4)
D 437,5 (17,2)
E See the image above
F 286,2 (11,3)
G Ball centre
Related information
Towbar* (p. 472)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 654)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
474
Extendable and retractable towbar*
The extendable/retractable towbar is always
easily accessible and simple to extend or retract
as needed. In the retracted position, the towbar
is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towbar carefully.
Extending the towbar
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
1.
Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the right-
hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
with a constant orange glow for the exten-
sion function to be active.
2.
Press and release the button - extension
might not start if the button is pressed for too
long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towbar.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension proce-
dure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
475
3.
Move the towbar to its end position, where it
is secured and locked in place - the indicator
lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while and
the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
ing the towbar.
If the car detects a connected trailer electri-
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
Retracting the towbar
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the tow-
bar.
1.
Open the tailgate. Press and release the but-
ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the
cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
> The towbar automatically lowers in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp in
the button flashes orange.
2.
Lock the towbar by moving it back to its
retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
a constant glow if the towbar is correctly
retracted.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Towbar* (p. 472)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
476
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of
points that are important to think about regar-
ding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is
positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
load by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
for towing a trailer.
The car's towbar must be of an approved
type.
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towbar complies with the
specified maximum towball load. Towball load
is calculated as part of the car's payload.
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load.
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear when shifting manually and
adjust your speed.
Follow the regulations in force for the permit-
ted speeds and weights.
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil-
ity are reduced due to the reduced air den-
sity, and the maximum trailer load must
therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part
thereof).
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a
13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin con-
nector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make
sure the cable does not drag on the ground.
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
Trailer weights
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours to
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
477
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk
of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine
and drive system overheats, a warning symbol
comes on in the driver display together with a
message.
The following only applies to cars with automatic
gearbox.
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
Related information
Trailer stability assist* (p. 477)
Checking trailer lamps (p. 478)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 654)
Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 470)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 659)
Trailer stability assist*
The function of trailer stability assist (TSA
21
) is to
stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where
they begin snaking. The function is included in
the stability system ESC
22
.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer stability assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
478
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and engine
power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradu-
ally suppressed and the car/trailer combination is
stable once again, the system stops regulating
and the driver once again has full control of the
car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre dis-
play.
Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
tion the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver causing the snaking.
When trailer stability assist is
operating, the ESC symbol
flashes in the driver display.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Electronic stability control (p. 286)
Checking trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on
the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before setting off.
Symbol Message
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
broken, the driver display symbol for direction
indicators will also flash more quickly than nor-
mal.
21
Trailer Stability Assist
22
Electronic Stability Control
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
479
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear
fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi-
ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working
before starting off.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar,
the
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check mes-
sage is shown in the driver display.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be switched
off in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
possible to start the check manually.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Related information
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Towbar-mounted bicycle rack*
When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that
Volvo has developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are availa-
ble for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the
bicycle rack.
Bicycle rack including load must weigh a
maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds).
The bicycle rack may be designed for a maxi-
mum of three bicycles.
WARNING
Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause
damage to the towbar and car.
The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if
it:
is incorrectly fitted on the towball
is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's
instructions for maximum load weight
is used for carrying something other than
bicycles.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
480
The car's driving characteristics are affected
when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For
example, due to:
increased weight
reduced acceleration capacity
reduced ground clearance
changed braking capacity.
Recommendations for loading bicycles
on the bicycle rack
The larger the distance between the load's cen-
tre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load
on the towbar.
Load according to the following recommenda-
tions:
Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to
the car.
Keep the load symmetrical and as close to
the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by
loading the bicycles facing alternately if sev-
eral bicycles are loaded.
Remove loose objects from the bicycle for
transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery,
child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the
towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce
the wind resistance, which affects fuel con-
sumption.
Do not use protective covers on the bicycles.
This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil-
ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also
lead to an increased load on the towbar.
Related information
Towbar* (p. 472)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another vehi-
cle by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km (50 miles).
WARNING
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
vated.
Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
481
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car.
4.
Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
5.
Move the gear selector to neutral position N
and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
and the engine does not start.
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged dur-
ing attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 481)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 158)
Recovery (p. 483)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
Selecting ignition mode (p. 423)
Fitting and removing the towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is
no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
under the floor in the cargo area.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
482
Front: Remove the cover - press on the
marking with a finger.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark-
ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold
out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread
through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as
a lever.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
Removing the towing eye:
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return
it to its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
483
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible.
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you
try to pull it up using the towing eye.
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Related information
Towing (p. 480)
Recovery (p. 483)
Tool kit (p. 557)
Recovery
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is
equipped with air suspension, this must be disa-
bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the
function via the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi-
cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 481)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
484
HomeLink
®
*
23
HomeLink
®24
is a programmable remote control,
integrated in the car's electrical system, which
can remotely control up to three different devi-
ces (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, out-
door and indoor lighting, etc.) and thereby
replace the remote controls for them.
General
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
HomeLink
®
is supplied built-in to the interior
rearview mirror. The HomeLink
®
panel consists of
three programmable buttons and one indicator
lamp in the mirror glass.
For more information about HomeLink
®
, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277)
25
.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
mended that the programming for the buttons is
deleted when the car is sold.
Related information
Using HomeLink (p. 486)
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 487)
Programming HomeLink
®
*
26
Follow these instructions to program
HomeLink
®
, reset all programming or reprogram
individual buttons.
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
HomeLink
®
can be programmed or used. If
possible, fit new batteries in the remote con-
trol that shall be replaced by HomeLink
®
for
faster programming and improved transmis-
sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink
®
but-
tons should be reset before programming.
WARNING
While programming HomeLink
®
, the garage
door or gate being programmed may activate.
For this reason, make sure that nobody is in
the vicinity of the door or gate while program-
ming is in progress. The car should be outside
the garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
23
Applies to certain markets.
24
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
25
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
26
Applies to certain markets.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
485
1. Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator
lamp on HomeLink
®
.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink
®
is improved at a dis-
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming.
2. Press and hold depressed both the button
on the remote control and the button to be
reprogrammed on HomeLink
®
.
3. Do not release the buttons until the indicator
lamp has switched from flashing slowly
(approx. once per second) to either flashing
quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illu-
minating with a constant glow.
>
If it illuminates with a constant glow:
Indication that the programming has fin-
ished. Press the programmed button
twice to activate.
If it flashes quickly: The device to be
programmed to HomeLink
®
may have a
security function that requires extra steps.
Test by pressing the programmed button
twice to see whether the programming is
working. Otherwise, continue with the fol-
lowing steps.
4. Locate programming button
27
on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
5. Depress and release the receiver's program-
ming button once. The programming must be
completed within 30 seconds of the button
being depressed.
6.
Press and release the button on HomeLink
®
that you want to program. Repeat the
sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a
second time and, depending on the receiver
model, even a third time.
> Programming is now be complete and the
garage door, gate or similar should now
be activated when the programmed but-
ton is depressed.
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.HomeLink.com,
27
Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
486
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277)
28
.
Reprogramming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
®
button,
proceed as follows:
1. Press the desired button and hold it
depressed for approx. 20 seconds.
2.
Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink
®
starts to flash slowly, programming can con-
tinue as normal.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink
®
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. Individual buttons can only be reprogram-
med.
Press and hold depressed the outer buttons
(1 and 3) on HomeLink
®
for approx. 10 sec-
onds.
> When the indicator lamp changes over
from a constant glow to starting to flash,
the buttons are reset and ready to be
reprogrammed.
Related information
Using HomeLink (p. 486)
HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 487)
Using HomeLink
When HomeLink
®
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illu-
minates or flashes when the button has been
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink
®
if
required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
®
will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
WARNING
If HomeLink
®
is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
the door or gate while it is in motion.
Do not use HomeLink
®
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
28
Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
487
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
* (p. 487)
Type approval for HomeLink
®
*
29
Type approval for EU
Gentex Corporation hereby declares that
HomeLink
®
Model UAHL5 complies with the
Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU.
Wavelength within which the radio equipment
functions:
433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P.
868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P.
868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P.
869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P.
Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation,
600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464,
USA
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
HomeLink
®
* (p. 484)
Compass
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Related information
Activating and deactivating the compass
(p. 488)
Calibrating the compass (p. 488)
29
Applies to certain markets.
STARTING AND DRIVING
488
Activating and deactivating the
compass
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Activating and deactivating the
compass
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass manually:
Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Related information
Compass (p. 487)
Calibrating the compass (p. 488)
Calibrating the compass
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is
moved between several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri-
cal equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear-
view mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds
(use a paper clip, for example). The number
for the current magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
489
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-
acter
C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
Compass (p. 487)
Activating and deactivating the compass
(p. 488)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
492
Sound, media and Internet
The audio and media system consists of media
player and radio. You can also connect a phone
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is con-
nected to the Internet you can also use apps for
media playback.
Overview of audio and media
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which
audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is connected to the Inter-
net, it is possible to download system updates for
optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Media player (p. 502)
Radio (p. 496)
Phone (p. 517)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Apps (p. 493)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Driver distraction (p. 39)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 535)
Audio settings
The audio system is preset for optimal sound
reproduction but can be adapted according to
needs.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the right-
hand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for
example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing
phone calls and active traffic messages.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Audio settings as required
The following settings can be selected in the top
view under
Settings Sound:
Tone — personal preference for bass, treble,
equaliser for example.
Balance - balance between right/left loud-
speakers and balance between front/rear
loudspeakers.
System Volumes – adjusts volume in the
various systems of the car, e.g. Voice
Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
493
Sound experience*
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.
Sound Experience
is opened from the centre
display's app view and gives access to further
audio settings. The following settings can be
made:
Studio - the sound can be optimised for
Driver, All and Rear.
Individual stage - surround sound mode
with settings for intensity and enclosure.
Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics
from Gothenburg's Concert Hall.
Active noise reduction*
Certain cars are equipped with an active noise
reduction function that suppresses engine noise
in the passenger compartment via the audio sys-
tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-
tive noise and the audio system outputs anti-
noise in order to dampen the noise.
Microphones in the car's roof.
NOTE
Do not cover the car's microphones.
Related information
Media player (p. 502)
Settings for voice recognition (p. 144)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Apps
The app view contains applications (apps) that
give access to certain of the car's services.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
494
Swipe from right to left
1
across the centre dis-
play's screen in order to access the app view
from the home view. Apps that have been down-
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as
FM radio, are found here.
App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model)
Some basic apps are always available. More apps
such as web radio and music services can be
downloaded when the car is connected to the
Internet.
Certain apps are only available for use if the car
is connected to the Internet.
Start an app by pressing the app in the centre
display's app view.
Related information
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Updating apps (p. 495)
Deleting apps (p. 496)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 532)
Downloading apps
New apps can be downloaded when the car is
connected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select
New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
1
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
495
3. Tap on the row for an app in order to expand
in the list and get more information about the
app.
4.
Select
Install in order to start the download
and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installa-
tion is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot
be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
Cancelling the download
Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this can-
not be cancelled.
Related information
Apps (p. 493)
Updating apps (p. 495)
Deleting apps (p. 496)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Storage space on hard disk (p. 534)
Updating apps
The apps can be updated when the car is con-
nected to the Internet.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a phone, pay extra
attention to the data traffic costs.
If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Update all
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select
Install all.
> Updating is started.
Update some
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Install.
> Updating is started.
Related information
Apps (p. 493)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Deleting apps (p. 496)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
496
Deleting apps
Apps can be uninstalled when the car is con-
nected to the Internet.
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Open the
Download Centre app in the app
view.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis-
appears from the list.
Related information
Apps (p. 493)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Updating apps (p. 495)
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
online, it is also possible to listen to Internet
radio.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
Start radio (p. 497)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 497)
Setting radio favourites (p. 499)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Digital radio* (p. 501)
RDS radio (p. 501)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Media player (p. 502)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
497
Start radio
The radio is started from the centre display app
view.
1.
Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM)
from the app view.
2. Select a radio station.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 497)
Setting radio favourites (p. 499)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Changing radio band and radio
station
There are instructions here for changing the
radio band, the list in the radio band and the
radio station in the selected list.
Changing radio band
Swipe to show the app view in the centre display
and select the preferred radio band (e.g.
FM), or
open the driver display's app menu using the
right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and
make your selection from there.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
1.
Press
Library.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
498
2.
Select playback from
Stations, Favourites,
Genres or Ensembles
2
.
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
Favourites - only plays back selected favourite
channels.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast-
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change radio station in the selected
list via the centre display.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Setting radio favourites (p. 499)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Application menu in driver display (p. 99)
Searching for radio stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list of
the radio stations within the area that are trans-
mitting the strongest signals.
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
AM — station and frequency.
FM — station, genre and frequency.
DAB* - ensembles and stations.
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input of
a character and the search results are
shown by category.
Manual tuning
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
longer changes frequency automatically when
reception is poor.
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press
or . With a long press, the
search jumps to the next available station in
the frequency band. It is also possible to use
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Start radio (p. 497)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 497)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
2
Only applies to digital radio (DAB*).
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
499
Setting radio favourites
It is possible to add a radio channel to the
Radio favourites app and the favourites list for
the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to
add and remove favourites can be found below.
Radio Favourites
Radio Favourites shows saved
favourites from all frequency
bands.
1.
Open the app
Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
Adding and removing radio favourites
Tap on to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the
radio will automatically search for the best fre-
quency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Start radio (p. 497)
Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 497)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Application menu in driver display (p. 99)
Settings for radio
There are various radio functions to activate and
deactivate.
Cancelling traffic messages
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in the
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
on
Cancel in the centre display.
Activating and deactivating radio
functions
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band to view availa-
ble functions.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
500
AM/FM Radio
Show Broadcast Information: shows
information on programme content, artists,
etc.
Freeze Program Name: select to stop the
programme service name from scrolling con-
tinuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds.
Select Announcements:
-
Local Interruptions: interrupts the current
media playback and broadcasts information
about traffic disruptions in the neighbour-
hood. Playback of previous media source is
resumed when the message is finished. The
Local Interruptions function is a geograph-
ically restricted version of the Traffic
Announcements function. The Traffic
Announcements function must be acti-
vated at the same time.
-
News : interrupts the current media play-
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre-
vious media source is resumed when the
news broadcast is finished.
-
Alarm: interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
-
Traffic Announcements: interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts infor-
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the
message is finished.
DAB* (digital radio)
Sort Services: option for how channels will
be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service
number.
DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function
for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio
channel is lost, another channel is found
automatically in another channel group
(ensemble).
DAB To FM Handover: starts the function
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM
frequency is searched for automatically.
Show Broadcast Information: select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
Show Program Related Images: select
whether or not to show images for pro-
grammes on the screen.
Select Announcements: select the types
of messages to be received while DAB is
playing. Selected messages will interrupt the
current media playback to play back the
message. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
-
Alarm: interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
-
Traffic Flash: receives information about
traffic disruptions.
-
News Flash: receives news.
-
Transport Flash: receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
-
Warning/Services: receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Digital radio* (p. 501)
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 120)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
501
RDS radio
RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio
automatically changes to the strongest transmit-
ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM
transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
gramme types or traffic information.
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when the
set programme type is no longer broadcast. To
go back earlier, press
on the right-hand
steering wheel keypad or tap
Cancel in the cen-
tre display.
Related information
Radio (p. 496)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Digital radio*
Digital radio (DAB
3
) is a digital broadcasting
system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB
+ and DMB
4
.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the
centre display.
Digital radio is played back in the same way as
other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the
option to select playback from
Stations,
Favourites and Genres, there is also the option
to select playback from subchannels and
Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio chan-
nels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same
frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
502
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named sub-
channels. These are temporary and can contain
e.g. translations of the main programme into
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with
an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information
Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 502)
Changing radio band and radio station
(p. 497)
Searching for radio stations (p. 498)
Setting radio favourites (p. 499)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Link between FM and digital radio*
The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to
switch from a channel with poor or no reception
to the same channel in another channel group
(ensemble) with better reception, within DAB
and/or between DAB and FM.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Media DAB.
3.
Tick/untick
DAB To DAB Handover and/or
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
Digital radio* (p. 501)
Radio (p. 496)
Settings for radio (p. 499)
Media player
The media player can play back audio from the
CD player* and from external audio sources con-
nected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also
play back video format via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books
and music services via apps.
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be oper-
ated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice con-
trol.
The radio is operated in the media player and is
described in a separate section.
3
Digital Audio Broadcasting
4
Digital Multimedia Broadcasting
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
503
Related information
Media playback (p. 503)
Controlling and changing media (p. 504)
Searching media (p. 505)
Apps (p. 493)
Radio (p. 496)
CD player* (p. 507)
Video (p. 507)
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 508)
Media via USB port (p. 509)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre
display. Several functions can also be operated
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and
model.)
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the app
CD from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Mp3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1. Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
504
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
4.
Open the app
Bluetooth from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Media with Internet connection
Play back media from Internet-connected apps:
1. Connect the car to the Internet.
2. Open the current app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Read the separate section on how apps are
downloaded.
Video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Android Auto
Android Auto is described in a separate section.
Related information
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
Radio (p. 496)
Controlling and changing media (p. 504)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 509)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Video (p. 507)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Controlling and changing media
The playback of media can be controlled with
voice control, steering wheel keypad or the cen-
tre display.
The media player can be oper-
ated by voice recognition, from
the steering wheel keypad or
the centre display.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
display or press
on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad in order to increase or
decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
song being played back, the physical button
under the centre display or
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
505
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
the centre display, press on
or under
the centre display or on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
and hold
or under the centre display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Changing media - select from previous sources
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Related information
Media player (p. 502)
Searching media (p. 505)
Audio settings (p. 492)
Apps (p. 493)
Gracenote
®
(p. 506)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and,
when the car is connected to the Internet, pod-
casts (digital media via Internet).
1.
Press .
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms.
3.
Press
Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
Media player (p. 502)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
506
Media playback (p. 503)
Enter the characters, letters and words man-
ually in the centre display (p. 125)
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during
playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music rec-
ognition.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
Gracenote
®
Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is upda-
ted continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and down-
load, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Media playback (p. 503)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 535)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
507
CD player*
The media player can play back CD discs with
compatible audio files.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
Media playback (p. 503)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Video
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move,
but only the audio is played back. The picture is
shown again when the car is stationary.
Information on compatible formats for media can
be found in a separate section.
Related information
Playing a video (p. 507)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 508)
Settings for video (p. 508)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Playing a video
Videos are played using the
USB app in the app
view.
1. Connecting a media source (USB device).
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Related information
Video (p. 507)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 508)
Settings for video (p. 508)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
508
Playing back DivX
®
This DivX Certified
®
device must be registered in
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Related information
Video (p. 507)
Playing a video (p. 507)
Settings for video (p. 508)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Settings for video
It is possible to change certain video playback
settings, e.g. language.
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing
Settings
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Related information
Video (p. 507)
Media via Bluetooth
®
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files
from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile
phones and tablets.
For the media player to be able to play back
audio files wirelessly from an external device, the
device must first be connected to the car via
Bluetooth.
Related information
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 509)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Media playback (p. 503)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
509
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
Connect a Bluetooth
®
device to the car for wire-
less playback of media and to provide the car
with an Internet connection where possible.
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth
®
technology, but not all of them are
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility,
see support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone to the car
via Bluetooth
®
.
Related information
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 508)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Media playback (p. 503)
Media via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
the car's USB port.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the igni-
tion is in position I, II or the engine is running.
The content of the external source can be loaded
more quickly if it only consists of compatible for-
mats. Video files can also be played back via the
USB port.
Certain MP3 players have their own file system
that the car does not support.
Related information
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
Media playback (p. 503)
Video (p. 507)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 534)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Connecting a device via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod
®
or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
one of the car's USB ports.
The phone must be connected to the USB port
with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the
lid is closed.
V90CC Volvo Ocean Race also has USB inputs
(type A) for charging
5
on the rear of the tunnel
console and in the cargo area.
Related information
Media playback (p. 503)
Media via USB port (p. 509)
5
It is not possible to playback media in the car's audio or media system via these inputs. Charging may be restricted during certain use.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
510
Media player (p. 502)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 534)
Technical specifications for USB devices
(p. 534)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Android Auto* (p. 515)
TV*
6
No images are shown once the car reaches a
certain speed but the sound will be heard the
whole time. The picture returns once more when
the car is almost or completely stationary.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev-
eral functions can also be controlled from the
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition.
Related information
Using the TV* (p. 510)
Settings for TV* (p. 511)
Using the TV*
7
The TV is started from the app view. Tap on the
TV app and select a channel.
The TV automatically searches for the channels
with best reception.
Change the list of visible channels
1.
Press
Library
2.
Select playback from
TV-channels or
Favourites.
3. Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
Press on or under the centre dis-
play or on the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:
Tap on in order to add/remove a chan-
nel to/from the favourites list.
6
Applies to certain markets.
7
Applies to certain markets.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
511
TV guide
A programme guide is available with information
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
Tap on Guide to show information about TV
programmes.
NOTE
If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
from city to city, it is not certain that
Favourites are available since the frequency
may have changed.
NOTE
The system only supports TV broadcasts in
the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or
MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2
standard. The system does not support ana-
logue broadcasts.
Related information
TV* (p. 510)
Settings for TV* (p. 511)
Voice control of radio and media (p. 144)
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 535)
Settings for TV*
8
The option to make certain settings is available,
both in the top view or when the TV is in full
screen mode.
With the TV in full screen mode, or by opening
the top view and pressing
Settings Media
TV, the following can be adjusted:
Subtitle Language
Audio Language
Pict. format
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
shown in.
1.
Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
2.
Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with-
out cropping.
Related information
TV* (p. 510)
Using the TV* (p. 510)
Compatible media formats (p. 533)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music,
make phone calls, get directions, send/receive
messages and use Siri, all while you stay
focused on your driving.
CarPlay works with selected
Apple devices. If the car does
not already support CarPlay
there is the option to install it
retroactively. Contact a Volvo
retailer to install CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay
may sometimes mean that the connection
between an iPhone and the car is broken. Please
note that Volvo is not responsible for the content
in CarPlay.
When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is
no guidance in the driver display or head-up dis-
play, but only in the centre display.
The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the cen-
tre display, phone or using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions).
The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri.
A long press on the steering wheel button
8
Applies to certain markets.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
512
starts voice control using Siri and a short press
activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks
off too early, hold the steering wheel button
9
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 512)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 513)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be acti-
vated in your phone. The phone must also have
an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile
network.
Connect an iPhone and start CarPlay
NOTE
CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is
deactivated. A phone or media player con-
nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore
not be available when CarPlay is active. An
alternative Internet source must be used to
connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use
Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The tile with CarPlay is opened and com-
patible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting CarPlay
CarPlay is started according to the following after
an iPhone has been connected.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with
CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are
shown.
3. If the tile with CarPlay is not opened, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
> The tile with CarPlay is opened and com-
patible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
CarPlay runs in the background if another app is
started in the same tile. To show CarPlay in the
tile again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app
view.
9
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
513
Switch the connection between CarPlay
and iPod
CarPlay to iPod
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to
Communication Apple
CarPlay
.
3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
no longer start CarPlay automatically when
the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
5.
Open the app
iPod from the app view.
iPod to CarPlay
1.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on
OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
> The tile with Apple CarPlay is opened and
compatible apps are shown
10
.
Related information
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 513)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Settings for Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Settings for Apple device connected with
CarPlay
11
.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Apple
CarPlay
and select setting:
Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
Untick the box - CarPlay does not start
automatically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
To delete the list, the settings must be reset in
the centre display (factory reset).
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
10
Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
11
Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
514
Related information
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
Using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 512)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Tips for using Apple
®
CarPlay
®
*
Here are some useful tips for using CarPlay
®
.
Update your iPhone with the latest version of
iOS operating system and ensure that the
apps have been updated.
In the event of a problem with CarPlay, dis-
connect the telephone from the USB port
and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the
app on the telephone that is not working and
then restart the app, or try closing all apps
and restart your phone.
If the apps do not appear when CarPlay
starts (black screen), try minimising and
expanding the tile for CarPlay.
Using apps that are not compatible with
CarPlay may sometimes mean that the con-
nection between the phone and the car is
broken. Information about supported apps
and compatible telephone models can be
found on Apple's website. You can also
search for CarPlay in the App Store to find
information about apps that are compatible
with CarPlay on your market.
CarPlay only works with iPhone
12
.
NOTE
Availability and functionality may vary depend-
ing on market.
Related information
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
12
Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
515
Android Auto*
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and use
car-adapted apps from an Android device.
Android Auto works with selected Android devi-
ces.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on the
website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is
not responsible for the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
Android Auto has been started once, the app will
be started automatically the next time the device
is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated
under settings.
NOTE
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
another media player. Bluetooth is active
while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad or voice control. A long press on the steering
wheel button
starts voice recognition control
and a short press deactivates.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Related information
Using Android Auto* (p. 515)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516)
Using Android Auto*
To use the app
Android Auto, the telephone
must be connected to the car's USB port.
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port.
In the cases where there are two USB ports,
the one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up window
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Android Auto in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
516
Previously connected Android
1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the name of the phone is
shown.
2. Tap on the phone name - the tile with
Android Auto is opened and compatible apps
are shown.
3.
If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the
Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The tile with Android Auto is opened and
compatible apps are shown.
4. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same tile. To show
Android Auto in the tile again - tap on the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 516)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for a phone that has been connected
the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Android Auto
and select setting:
Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset has to be executed in order to
clear the list.
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
Voice Control
Navi Voice Guidance
Phone Ringtone
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Using Android Auto* (p. 515)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
* Option/accessory.
517
Tips for using Android Auto*
Here are some useful tips for using Android
Auto.
Ensure that your apps are updated.
When starting the car, wait until the centre
display has started, connect the telephone
and then open Android Auto from the app
view.
In the event of problems with Android Auto,
disconnect your Android phone from the
USB port and then reconnect via USB. Oth-
erwise, try closing the app on the phone and
then restarting the app.
When a telephone is connected to Android
Auto it is still possible to playback media via
Bluetooth to another media player. The
Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto
is used.
Related information
Android Auto* (p. 515)
Phone
A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wire-
lessly to the car's built-in hands-free system.
The audio and media system acts as hands-free,
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the phone's functions. The phone can still be
operated with its own keys even if it is connected
to the car.
When a phone has been connected online and
connected with the car, it can be used make
calls, send/receive messages, play back media
wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection.
The phone is operated from the
centre display, but some opera-
tions are also available via voice
recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel key-
pad.
Overview
Microphone.
Phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice rec-
ognition.
Driver display.
Related information
Managing phone calls (p. 522)
Managing the phone book (p. 524)
Managing text messages (p. 523)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
518
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 520)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 520)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Voice recognition (p. 141)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
Audio settings (p. 492)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth for the first time
Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to
then be able to make calls from the car, send/
receive messages, play back media wirelessly
and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con-
nected at once, in which case one of them can
only play back wirelessly. The most recently con-
nected phone will automatically be connected to
make calls, send/receive messages, play back
media and provide an Internet connection. It is
possible to change the use of the phone in the
settings for
Bluetooth Devices.
After the device has been connected/registered
a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be
visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth acti-
vated. To connect the car to the Internet via a
phone, tethering must also be activated on the
phone. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth
devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
3. Open the tile for the phone.
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
list is updated as new devices are
detected.
4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
5. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the phone. In which case,
choose to accept in both places.
6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
519
Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the tile for the phone.
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
5. Select the name of the car on the phone.
6. A pop-up window for the connection is
shown in the car. Confirm the connection.
7. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the external device. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
8. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In which
case, delete the phone from the car and then
connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 520)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 520)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
520
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth automatically
It is possible to connect a phone to the car auto-
matically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have
been connected to the car for the first time.
It is only the two last connected phones that can
be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set-
ting the car in ignition position I.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2.
Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
manually (p. 520)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Connecting a phone to the car via
Bluetooth manually
It is possible to connect a phone to the car man-
ually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been
connected to the car for the first time.
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2. Open the tile for the phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
> The phone will connect.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
automatically (p. 520)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
521
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-
connected phone
Disconnect a Bluetooth-connected phone from
the car by deactivating Bluetooth on your phone.
When the phone is out of range of the car it is
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call then the call can be
continued on the phone.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Switch between Bluetooth-
connected phones
It is possible to switch between a number of
Bluetooth-connected phones.
1. Open the tile for the phone.
2.
Tap on
Change or drag down the top
view and tap on
Settings
Communication Bluetooth Devices
Add device.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Removing a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 522)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
522
Removing a Bluetooth-connected
phone
It is possible to remove phones from the list of
registered Bluetooth devices.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
.
> Registered Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
4.
Tap on
Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The phone is no longer registered to the
car.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone
(p. 521)
Switch between Bluetooth-connected
phones (p. 521)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Generic illustration.
Making phone calls
1. Open the tile for the phone.
2. Select call from: call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on
in the contact list in order to
add a contact under
Favourites.
3.
Press
.
4.
Tap on
to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via the
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad .
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Press
Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4.
Tap on
Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5.
Tap on
to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1.
Tap on
Join calls to merge the active multi-
party call.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
play and the centre display. Manage the call on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
centre display.
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
to end the call.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
523
Private call
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the call
continues on your mobile phone.
Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off
and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Handling the application menu in the driver
display (p. 100)
Enter the characters, letters and words man-
ually in the centre display (p. 125)
Managing the phone book (p. 524)
Managing text messages (p. 523)
Audio settings (p. 492)
Managing text messages
Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth-
connected phone.
In some phones, the message function must be
activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such
cases, they cannot display contacts and mes-
sages in the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre dis-
play if the setting is selected.
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages
in the centre display.
Reading text messages in the centre display
Press the icon to get the message
read aloud.
Sending text messages in the centre
display
13
1. You can reply to a message or create a new
message.
Reply to message — tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then
tap on
Answer.
Create new message - tap on
Create
new. Select a contact or enter a number.
2. Compose the message.
3.
Press
Send.
Managing text messages in the driver
display
Text messages are only shown in the driver dis-
play if the setting is selected.
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
To have the message read aloud – select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message has been read out, it is
possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is
connected to the Internet.
Press Answer with the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialogue starts.
13
Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
524
Message notification
It is possible to activate and deactivate notifica-
tions in the text message settings.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Settings for text messages (p. 524)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Enter the characters, letters and words man-
ually in the centre display (p. 125)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Settings for text messages
Settings for text messages on connected phone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
Notification in centre display - shows
message notifications in the centre dis-
play's status bar.
Notification in driver display - displays
notifications in the driver's display and
incoming messages can be managed
using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text messages.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Managing text messages (p. 523)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Managing the phone book
Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Browse between the letters and to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
525
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are sorted
under
. It is possible to sort by first name or
surname, and this setting is adjusted in the tele-
phone setup.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Controlling a telephone with voice recogni-
tion (p. 143)
Enter the characters, letters and words man-
ually in the centre display (p. 125)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Settings for phone
When the telephone is connected to the car, the
following settings can be made:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press Communication Phone and
select settings:
Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
to use a ringtone from the phone or the
car. Some phones are not fully compatible
and their ringtones may therefore not be
available for use in the car. For compatibil-
ity, see support.volvocars.com.
Sort order - select sort order of contact
list.
Call notifications in head up display*
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3.
Select
Show Phone.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Settings for text messages (p. 524)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Audio settings (p. 492)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
526
Settings for Bluetooth devices
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select settings:
Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
Previously paired devices - lists con-
nected devices.
Remove device - removes the connected
device.
Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and as
Internet connection.
Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth con-
nection.
Related information
Phone (p. 517)
Settings for phone (p. 525)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Internet-connected car*
When the car is connected to the Internet, it is
possible – for example – to use web radio and
music services via apps, download software and
contact your retailer from the car.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
the car's built-in modem*.
When the car is online, its Internet connection
(Wi-Fi hotspot) can be shared to allow other devi-
ces to use the Internet connection
14
.
Connection status is indicated by a symbol in the
centre display's status bar.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
ther charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or the car modem*.
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com before connecting the car
to the Internet.
14
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
527
Related information
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 120)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Bluetooth) (p. 527)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
Apps (p. 493)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
Sharing Internet access from the car via a
Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 530)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
Volvo ID (p. 26)
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 532)
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Bluetooth)
Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by
sharing your phone's Internet access and
access several online services in the car.
The phone and network operator must support
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and
the subscription plan must include data.
1. To be able to connect the car to the Internet
via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone
has to have already been connected to the
car via Bluetooth for a first time. Ensure that
the personal hotspot (portable/personal hot-
spot) is activated in your phone.
2. If the phone has been connected via Blue-
tooth previously, press
Settings in the cen-
tre display top view.
3.
In the centre display: Press
Communication
Bluetooth Devices.
4.
Tick the box for
Bluetooth Internet
connection under the heading Internet
connection.
> Your car is now connected to the Internet
via the Bluetooth-connected phone.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or the car modem*.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth
for the first time (p. 518)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
Apple
®
CarPlay
®
* (p. 511)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 526)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
528
Connecting the car to the Internet
via a mobile device (Wi-Fi)
Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by shar-
ing your phone's Internet access and access
several online services in the car.
The phone and network operator must support
tethering (sharing the Internet connection) and
the subscription plan must include data.
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) on the phone.
2.
Press
Settings in the top view.
3. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Wi-Fi.
5. Tap on the network name of the network to
be connected.
6. Enter the network password.
7. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been discon-
nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
is used.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con-
nected phones are deleted. To show a list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, go to
Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi con-
nection, are described in a separate section.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 531)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
Connect the car to the Internet via
car modem (SIM card)
For cars equipped with Volvo On Call*, it is pos-
sible to establish an Internet connection via the
car modem and a personal SIM card (P-SIM).
When the car is connected to the Internet via the
car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
connection.
1.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder under
the cargo area floor.
2.
Press
Settings in the top view.
3. Press Communication Car Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for
Car modem Internet.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
529
5. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
Settings for car modem (p. 529)
Settings for car modem
15
The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
possible to share the Internet connection via
Wi-Fi.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Car Modem
Internet
and select settings:
Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
Network
Select network operator
- automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
net when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
vider in your home country.
SIM card PIN
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
Related information
Connect the car to the Internet via car
modem (SIM card) (p. 528)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
15
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
530
Sharing Internet access from the
car via a Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is online, its Internet connection
can be shared to allow other devices to use the
Internet connection
16
.
The network operator (SIM card) must support
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Press
Communication Car Wi-Fi
Hotspot
.
3.
Tap on
Network name and name the
shared connection.
4.
Tap on
Password and select a password to
be entered on connecting devices.
5.
Tap on
Frequency band and select the fre-
quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
nection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
Press
Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 120)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
16
Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
531
No or poor Internet connection
Factors that affect the Internet connection.
The amount of data transferred is dependent on
the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
signal strength.
Phone to car
The speed of the Internet connection may vary
depending on the location of the phone in the
car. Move the phone closer to the centre display
in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure
that there is no source of interference in
between.
Phone to network operator
The speed of the mobile network varies depend-
ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tun-
nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agree-
ment you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, con-
tact your network operator.
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the Internet connection
then it may help to restart the phone.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 532)
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2. Continue to Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
3.
Tap on
Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the net-
work in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
user data and system settings are reset to origi-
nal factory settings.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
No or poor Internet connection (p. 531)
Resetting settings in the centre display
(p. 131)
Connecting the car to the Internet via a
mobile device (Wi-Fi) (p. 528)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
532
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz
17
.
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced perform-
ance.
Related information
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
User terms and conditions and data
sharing
The first time certain services and apps are
started, a pop-up window with the headings
Terms and conditions and Data sharing may
be shown.
The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user
terms and conditions and policy for data sharing.
By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that
certain information is sent from the car. This is
required so that certain services and apps can
have full functionality.
Data sharing can be set from the centre display's
settings menu.
Related information
Activating and deactivating data sharing
(p. 532)
Activating and deactivating data
sharing
Data sharing for services and apps required can
be set in the centre display's settings menu.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2. Press
System Privacy and data.
3.
Select
Data sharing to activate or deacti-
vate data sharing.
4. When data sharing is activated, settings for
individual services and apps can be changed
in the list below.
When data sharing is deactivated, the earlier set-
tings for individual services and apps remain
available when data sharing is reactivated.
Related information
User terms and conditions and data sharing
(p. 532)
17
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
533
Compatible media formats
The following file formats must be used for
media playback.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, m4v
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
MKV .mkv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX certified devices have been tested for high-
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution 720x576
Bit rate 4.8Mbps
Frame rate 30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater pro-
file. Visit divx.com for more
information and software
tools to convert your files
into DivX Home Theater
video.
Related information
Media player (p. 502)
Video (p. 507)
Playing back DivX
®
(p. 508)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
534
Technical specifications for USB
devices
The following specifications must be met to
allow the contents of the USB devices to be
read.
No folder structure will be shown in the centre
display during playback.
Max number
Files 15 000
Folders 1 000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Items in a playlist 1 000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specification for USB A
connector
Type A socket
Version 2.0
Voltage supply 5 V
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
Media via USB port (p. 509)
Storage space on hard disk
It is possible to view how much free space there
is on the car's hard disk.
Storage information for the car's hard disk,
including total capacity, available capacity and
how much space is used for installed apps can
be shown. The information is available under
Settings System System Information
Storage.
Related information
Apps (p. 493)
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
535
License agreement for audio and
media
A license is an agreement for the right to oper-
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following texts
are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/
developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
Dirac Unison
®
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logotypes
are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
used under licence.
This DivX Certified
®
device can play back DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete the registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote
®
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
536
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun-
tries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online
servers or embedded databases (together called
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data
in accordance with the intended end-user func-
tions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote
software and Gracenote servers for your own
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote
software or any Gracenote data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-
note servers will be terminated if you violate
these restrictions. If your license is terminated
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers.
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
will under no circumstances have any obligation
to pay you for any information you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
pany's rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur-
pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui-
ries without knowing anything about who you are.
Additional information is available on the web
page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
note service.
The Gracenote software and everything included
in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is".
Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran-
ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv-
ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote servers or to change data
categories for any reason that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace-
note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free
or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption. Grace-
note has no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
company reserves the right to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
537
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
538
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
539
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
540
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan
Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU.
For more information, see support.volvocars.com.
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
541
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
542
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备,必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
}}
543
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
기기는 가정용(B ) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 󸭥적으로 하며, 󸭤든
지역에서 사용할 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
||
SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET
* Option/accessory.
544
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應
立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
Sound, media and Internet (p. 492)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Media player (p. 502)
Gracenote
®
(p. 506)
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 32)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
546
Tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre
information sticker found on the driver's side door
pillar (between the front door and the rear door).
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
nal tyres that have the VOL
1
marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there-
fore important that the new tyres also have this
marking in order for the car's driving characteris-
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main-
tained.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially impor-
tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is
then manufactured in week 07, year 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam-
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discolouration.
Tyre economy
Maintain the correct tyre pressure.
Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squeal-
ing tyres.
Tyre wear increases with speed.
Correct wheel alignment is very important.
Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy
and travelling comfort.
The tyres must have the same direction of
rotation during their entire service life.
When you change tyres, the tyres with the
best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels
to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy
braking.
If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes
you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims
permanently.
Tyre rotation
The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving
style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition
affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Cor-
rect tyre pressure results in more even wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
1
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
547
and rear wheels should be switched with each
other. A suitable distance for the first change is
approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then
at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work-
shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer-
tain about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under-
steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
ding to one side, resulting in possible complete
loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels.
Storing wheels and tyres
When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on
wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned
lying on their sides on the floor.
Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on
their sides or standing upright, but not hung up.
IMPORTANT
Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark
place, and should never be stored close to
solvents, petrol, oils, etc.
WARNING
Wheel rim size and tyre size for your
Volvo are specified to meet stringent
requirements for stability and driving cha-
racteristics. Unapproved combinations of
wheel rim size and tyre size may have a
negative effect on the car's stability and
driving characteristics.
Any damage caused by the fitting of
unapproved combinations of wheel rim
size and tyre size is not covered by the
new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liabil-
ity for death, personal injury or any costs
caused by such installations.
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 549)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Dimension designation for tyre
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
235/55 R18 104 V.
235 Tyre width (mm)
55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
104 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
548
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum per-
mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The
only exception to these regulations is winter
tyres
2
, where a lower speed rating may be used.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which
the car can be driven depends on road condi-
tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win-
ter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
specifications, which can be found in the prin-
ted owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a
load index or speed rating is used, it may
overheat and be damaged.
Related information
Tyres (p. 546)
Dimension designation for wheel rim
(p. 548)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed
rating for tyres (p. 666)
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
18 Rim diameter in inches
50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Related information
Tyres (p. 546)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
2
Both those with metal studs and those without.
WHEELS AND TYRES
549
Tyres' rotation direction
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same
direction throughout its lifespan.
Tyres should only be switched between front
and rear positions, never between left and
right-hand sides, or vice versa.
If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's
braking characteristics and capacity to force
rain and slush out of the way are adversely
affected.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Related information
Tyres (p. 546)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread
will be level in height with the tread wear indica-
tors. Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro-
vide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information
Tyres (p. 546)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
550
Checking tyre pressure
Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving
stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of
the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu-
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Driving on
tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could
result in the tyres overheating and being dam-
aged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort,
road noise and driving characteristics.
Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre
pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to
achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal
wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high
may cause uneven wear on the tyres.
WARNING
Tyre pressure that is too low is the most
common cause of tyre failure and may
result in serious cracks in the tyre, the
tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with
unexpected loss of control of the car and
increased risk of personal injury.
Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce
the load capacity of the car.
Cold tyres
The tyre pressure must be checked when the
tyres are cold.
Tyres are considered cold when they have the
same temperature as the surrounding air.
This temperature is normally reached when the
car has been parked for at least three hours.
After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile)
these tyres are considered as warm. If you have
to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first
check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to
a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the
pump.
When the outside temperature changes, the tyre
pressure also changes. A decrease in tempera-
ture of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to
decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure
regularly and adjust to the correct pressure,
which is specified on the car's tyre information
plate or certification label.
If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are
warm then you must never release any air. The
tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for
the pressure to increase above the recom-
mended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with
tyre pressure equal to or below the recommenda-
tion for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far
too low.
Related information
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
Tyres (p. 546)
Adjusting tyre pressure
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a nat-
ural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must there-
fore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain
the recommended tyre pressure.
Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold
tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance
and optimal wear.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre
and then press the tyre pressure gauge
firmly down onto the valve.
2. Inflate to the recommended pressure.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
551
3. Refit the dust cap.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted
nails or other objects that could puncture the
tyre and cause leakage.
5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts,
bumps or other irregularities.
6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare
tyre*.
NOTE
If you have over-inflated, release air by press-
ing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve.
Then check the pressure again using the tyre
pressure gauge.
Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pres-
sure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pres-
sure table or on the tyre pressure plate.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows
which pressures the tyres should have at differ-
ent loads and speed conditions.
The plate displays the designation for the factory-
fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and
tyre pressure.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
comfort are desired.
Related information
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
552
Tyre pressure monitoring system*
The tyre pressure monitoring system, Indirect
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives
a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
Symbol Explanation
The symbol illuminates to indicate
low tyre pressure.
If there is a fault in the system the
tyre pressure warning symbol
flashes for approximately one
minute and then remains illumi-
nated.
System description
The tyre pressure monitoring system measures
differences in rotation speed between the differ-
ent wheels via the ABS system in order to be
able to determine whether they have the correct
tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the
tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is
its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with
each other the system can determine whether
one or more tyres have pressure that is too low.
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys-
tem is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre
should be cold and have the air pressure recom-
mended by the car manufacturer specified on the
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If
the car has tyres of a different size than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what
the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air
pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life,
and can affect car handling and stopping ability.
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system
fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym-
bol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
will flash for about one minute and then remain
illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea-
sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
with TPMS.
Messages on the instrument panel
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
driver display and a message is shown.
Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
after fill
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
Tyre pressure system Service required
To bear in mind
Always calibrate the system after a wheel
change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
553
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres-
sures.
If you change to tyres of a different size to
the ones fitted at the factory, the system
must be calibrated for these tyres to avoid
false warnings.
If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that
the tyre pressure monitoring system does not
work correctly due to the differences
between the wheels.
The system does not replace the need for
regular tyre inspection and maintenance.
It is not possible to switch off the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
play* (p. 555)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 556)
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-
toring* (p. 553)
Calibrate the system for tyre
pressure monitoring*
In order for the system for tyre pressure monitor-
ing, Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference value for
the tyre pressure must be determined. This must
be performed each time the tyres are changed
or the tyre pressure is changed.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol-
lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.
1. Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver's side.
3. Start the car.
4.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
554
5.
Press
TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Press
Calibrate.
7.
Tap on
OK to confirm that the tyre pressure
in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Run the car until calibration is complete.
Calibration is performed when the car is
driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
> When sufficient data has been collected
to enable the system to detect low tyre
pressure, the tyres in the centre display
change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirma-
tion that the calibration is complete.
If the car's ignition is switched off before
calibration is complete, the tyres in the
centre display change colour from grey to
green upon next start-up, even if calibra-
tion is not complete. Perform calibration
again and allow it to complete within the
same operating cycle to ensure that the
calibration is carried out correctly.
If start-up of calibration fails, the following
message appears:
Calibration
unsuccessful. Try again..
NOTE
Remember to always calibrate the tyre pres-
sure monitoring system when you have
changed a wheel or if the tyre pressure has
been changed according to the tyre pressure
label or tyre pressure table.
If correct reference values have not been set,
the system may not warn correctly about low
tyre pressure.
The car must be stationary with the engine
running for you to have access to the calibra-
tion button and start the calibration process.
WARNING
The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide,
which is invisible and odourless, but highly
toxic. For this reason, calibration must always
be performed outside or in a workshop with
exhaust extraction.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
play* (p. 555)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 556)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
555
See tyre pressure statue in the
centre display*
With the system for tyre pressure monitoring,
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS), tyre pressure status can be viewed in
the centre display.
Checking status
1.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
2.
Tap on
TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
Status indication
The graphics in the centre display show the sta-
tus for each tyre
3
.
Green tyre:
The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
a warning.
Yellow tyre:
The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as
soon as possible. Calibrate the system after
the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
All tyres yellow:
The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by
inflating as soon as possible. Calibrate the
system after the tyre pressures have been
adjusted.
All tyres grey:
Calibration in progress.
Unknown status.
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
may be required for the system to become active.
All tyres grey and a message:
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact a
workshop
4
.
Related information
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-
toring* (p. 553)
Action in the event of warning for low tyre
pressure (p. 556)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
Car status (p. 592)
3
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
4
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
556
Action in the event of warning for
low tyre pressure
When the tyre pressure monitoring system,
Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
(ITPMS) gives a warning, the tyre pressure in
one or more of the car's tyres is too low and
action is required.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for the sys-
tem is illuminated and the
Tyre
pressure low message is shown.
1. Switch off the car.
2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with
a tyre pressure gauge.
3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver's side.
4. Perform calibration of the system via the
centre display after tyre pressure adjustment.
Note that the indicator symbol does not
extinguish until the low tyre pressure has
been rectified and new calibration has been
performed.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 550)
Calibrate the system for tyre pressure moni-
toring* (p. 553)
See tyre pressure statue in the centre dis-
play* (p. 555)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
557
When changing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant
instructions for removing and fitting wheels.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 559)
Fitting the wheels (p. 561)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
Tool kit (p. 557)
Winter wheels (p. 563)
Spare wheel* (p. 562)
Wheel bolts (p. 558)
Tool kit
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
area.
The foam block under the cargo area floor con-
tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
jack and wheel wrench are included, as well as a
package with disposable gloves and a bag for the
damaged wheel.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 557)
Jack* (p. 557)
Jack*
The jack can be used to raise the car, for exam-
ple, to change to the spare wheel.
The figure is schematic - the version may vary.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
558
IMPORTANT
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
Models with self-levelling*
If the car is equipped with the air suspension
option then this function must be deactivated
before the car is raised with the jack.
Related information
Tool kit (p. 557)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the
hubs.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 559)
Fitting the wheels (p. 561)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
559
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when chang-
ing wheels. Wheel changes must always be per-
formed correctly.
IMPORTANT
When the jack* is not in use it must be
stored in its storage space under the
cargo area floor.
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use,
such as when changing a wheel after a
puncture. Only the jack belonging to the
specific model is to be used to jack up
the car. If the car is to be jacked up more
often, or for a longer time than is required
just to change a wheel, use of a garage
jack is recommended. In this instance,
follow the instructions for use that come
with the equipment.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with
Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension, this
must be disabled before the car is raised
with a jack*.
3.
Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that
remain on the ground. Use, for example,
heavy wooden blocks or large stones.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
560
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as per
the instructions.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed into the
wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7. With the car still on the ground, use the
wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the
wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards
(anticlockwise).
8. When raising the car, it is important that the
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody. The triangle
markings in the plastic cover indicate the
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There
are two jacking points on each side of the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each
point.
9. Position the jack on level, firm and non-slip-
pery ground under the jacking point that will
be used.
10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so
that it makes contact with the car's jacking
point. Check that the head of the jack (or the
lift arms at a workshop) is correctly posi-
tioned in the jacking point so that the bump
in the centre of the head fits into the jacking
point hole and the base is positioned verti-
cally below the jacking point.
11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away
from the side of the car as possible, at which
point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
direction of the car.
12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel
to be removed to move freely. Remove the
wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
Settings for level control* (p. 453)
When changing wheels (p. 557)
Raise the car (p. 595)
Jack* (p. 557)
Tool kit (p. 557)
Fitting the wheels (p. 561)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
561
Fitting the wheels
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
wheels.
NOTE
The jack included with the car is only
designed for occasional, short-term use, such
as when changing a wheel after a puncture.
Only the jack belonging to the specific model
is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to
be jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake and set the gear
selector in Park position (P).
Chock the wheels standing on the ground
using solid wood blocks or large stones.
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
Check that the jack is resting on a firm,
level surface that is not slippery and is
not slanted.
The jack must be correctly attached in
the jack's bracket.
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the
jack and the car's jacking point.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
If a wheel must be changed in a traf-
ficked environment, passengers must
stand in a safe place.
Use a jack designed for the car when
changing tyres. Use supports to secure
the car for all other work.
Never crawl under the car or reach under
with a part of your body when it is raised
on a jack.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor-
tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop-
erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check
the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
562
WARNING
The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened
several days after the change. Temperature
differences and vibration may mean that they
are not attached equally as tightly.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
Settings for level control* (p. 453)
When changing wheels (p. 557)
Raise the car (p. 595)
Jack* (p. 557)
Tool kit (p. 557)
Removing a wheel (p. 559)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
mal wheel.
The spare tyre is only designed for temporary
use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as
possible.
The car's driving characteristics can be changed
when the spare wheel is used and the ground
clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an
automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is
being used.
Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained
regardless of the position of the temporary spare
wheel on the car.
If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can
be purchased from a Volvo dealer.
WARNING
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the
car.
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one spare wheel of the type
"Temporary Spare" at the same time.
The car may have different driving charac-
teristics while driving with the spare
wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced
with a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The spare wheel is smaller than the nor-
mal wheel, which affects the car's ground
clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do
not machine-wash the car.
Follow the manufacturer's recommended
tyre pressure for the spare wheel.
On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the
rear axle can be disengaged.
If the spare wheel is fitted to the front
axle then it is not possible to use snow
chains at the same time.
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
563
IMPORTANT
The car must not be driven with tyres of dif-
ferent sizes or with a spare tyre other than
the one supplied with the car. Using different-
sized wheels can cause serious damage to
the car's transmission.
The illustration is schematic - the shape of the foam
block may vary depending on car model.
The spare wheel is located in the spare wheel
well with the outside down. The same bolt runs
through to secure the spare wheel and the foam
block. The foam block contains all the tools for
changing a wheel.
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 557)
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Taking out the spare wheel
Follow these instructions for handling the spare
wheel.
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the retaining screw.
3. Lift out the foam block with its tools.
4. Lift out the spare wheel.
Storing the punctured tyre
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lift it back into the car.
3. Screw in the foam block using the mounting
screws and then fold down the cargo area
floor.
4. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information
Spare wheel* (p. 562)
Winter wheels
Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
ditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs
settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre,
and especially the studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
564
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches).
Related information
When changing wheels (p. 557)
Winter driving (p. 457)
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 549)
Snow chains
Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help
to improve the traction in winter conditions.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious dam-
age to the car and lead to an accident.
IMPORTANT
Snow chains can be used on the car with the
following restrictions:
Volvo does not recommend the use of
show chains on wheel dimensions
greater than 18 inches.
Always follow the mounting instructions
from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the
chains as tensioned as possible and ten-
sion them at regular intervals.
Snow chains must only be used on the
front wheels (also applies to all-wheel
drive cars).
In some cases, snow chains must NOT
be used, such as if accessory, aftermar-
ket or "special" tyres and wheels are fit-
ted that have a different size to the origi-
nal tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance
must be maintained between the chains
and brakes, suspension and body compo-
nents.
Check local regulations with regard to
using snow chains before fitting them.
Never exceed the chain manufacturer's
specified maximum speed. You must
never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under
any circumstances.
Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when
driving with snow chains.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
565
Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and
tyres.
Driving with snow chains may have a
negative effect on the car's driving cha-
racteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as
well as braking with locked wheels.
Some types of chain that are firmly ten-
sioned affect brake components and
must therefore NOT be used.
You can obtain more information on snow chains
from a Volvo retailer.
Related information
Winter driving (p. 457)
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit
5
, is used to
seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust
the air pressure in the tyre.
Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the
puncture repair kit.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
as a temporary repair.
NOTE
The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres
with tread punctures but has limited ability to
seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use
the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres
displaying larger slits, cracks or similar dam-
age.
NOTE
The compressor is intended for temporary
emergency puncture repair and is approved
by Volvo.
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Sealing fluid bottle
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally
hazardous waste.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
Tyres (p. 546)
5
Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK)
WHEELS AND TYRES
566
Using a puncture repair kit
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Overview
Electrical cable
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
Connecting
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
WARNING
Please keep the following points in mind
when using the tyre sealing system:
The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber
latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These
substances are harmful if swallowed.
The contents of this bottle may cause
allergic skin reactions or otherwise be
potentially harmful to the respiratory tract,
the skin, the central nervous system, and
the eyes.
Precautions:
Store out of the reach of children.
Harmful if ingested.
Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with
the skin. If sealing fluid has come into
contact with your clothes, remove them.
Wash thoroughly after handling.
First aid:
Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with
soap and water. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least
15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper
and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if
symptoms occur.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
567
Inhalation: Move the exposed person to
fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical
attention.
Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting
unless directed to do so by medical per-
sonnel. Get medical attention.
Disposal: Dispose of this material and its
container at a hazardous or special waste
collection point.
WARNING
Do not remove the bottle when the punc-
ture repair kit is being used.
Do not remove the air hose when the
puncture repair kit is being used.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the com-
pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot-
tle holder.
The bottle and the bottle holder are equip-
ped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant
leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it
cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder
again. Bottle removal must be performed at a
workshop, Volvo recommends an authorised
Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
ing.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
568
8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres-
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres-
sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
WARNING
If the bottle is removed in the wrong order,
sealing fluid could spill out.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assis-
tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15.
Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
569
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
for recovery.
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
(19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi).
Release air using the pressure reducing
valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
Maximum mileage with tyres containing seal-
ing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste manage-
ment.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
Inflating tyres with the compressor from the
puncture repair kit (p. 569)
Inflating tyres with the compressor
from the puncture repair kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed in.
3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
570
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side
door pillar. Release air using the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The compressor is an electrical device. Follow
local regulations related to waste manage-
ment.
Related information
Recommended tyre pressure (p. 551)
Using a puncture repair kit (p. 566)
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 565)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COM-
PARTMENT
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
572
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment's inte-
rior and storage locations.
Front seat
Storage compartment in the door panel and by the
steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket, mesh
pocket* and USB port in the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in
the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel
console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Related information
Electrical sockets (p. 574)
Using the glovebox (p. 577)
Sun visors (p. 579)
Tunnel console (p. 573)
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 509)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
573
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
Storage compartment with cup holder for
driver and passenger as well as 12V socket.
Storage compartment and USB port under
the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
the cup holder, since this may trigger the
alarm.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for
example, are easily scratched by metal
objects. Do not place keys, phones and other
items on sensitive surfaces.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Electrical sockets (p. 574)
Climate controls (p. 210)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
574
Electrical sockets
There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one
230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console,
and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the
cargo area.
If a problem occurs with an electrical socket,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The 12 V sockets can be used for various acces-
sories designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
High voltage socket*
Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The high-voltage socket* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers
or laptops.
Status indication, high-voltage socket
An LED
1
lamp on the socket indicates the status
of the socket:
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
575
Status indication Reason Action
Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart-
ment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu-
ously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Using electrical sockets (p. 576)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
576
Using electrical sockets
12 V sockets can be used for various accesso-
ries designed for this, such as music players,
cooler boxes and mobile phones.
High-voltage sockets* can be used for various
accessories designed for this, such as chargers
and portable computers.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec-
trical system must be set in the lowest ignition
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with double lock temporarily deactivated,
then the sockets continue to be active for a fur-
ther seven minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of
discharging the starter battery, which can limit
functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electri-
cal sockets may be activated even when the
car's electrical system is disconnected or if
preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis-
connect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being
discharged.
WARNING
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the
socket or come loose when driving.
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example.
Position the accessory so that it is not at
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision.
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn
passengers or the interior.
Using 12 V sockets
1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front
of the socket and plug in the accessory's
connector.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not in use or if the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
Using high-voltage sockets
1.
Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
>
The LED
2
lamp on the socket indicates
the status.
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current avail-
able at the socket.
3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
plug - do not pull on the cable.
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unattended.
2
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
577
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the high-voltage
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.
WARNING
Only use accessories that are undam-
aged and fault-free. The accessories
must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The
accessories must have a CE marking, UL
marking or an equivalent safety marking.
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Related information
Electrical sockets (p. 574)
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also
space for a pen and card holder.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
578
Locking and unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
The key's designated storage space. The figure is sche-
matic - the design may vary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key.
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli-
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
Activating cooling
Deactivating cooling
Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving
the control to the end position toward the
passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Private locking (p. 275)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
579
Sun visors
There are sun visors in the roof in front of the
driver and the front seat passenger which can
be folded down and angled out to the side when
necessary.
The figure is schematic - the design may vary.
The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically
when the lid is lifted.
The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g.
cards or tickets.
Related information
Passenger compartment interior (p. 572)
Cargo area
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious. Use
load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure
the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to con-
ceal the load if desired.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Bag hooks (p. 581)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)
Recommendations for loading
There are a number of things to remember when
loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
responding weight.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Centre the load.
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
ered backrests.
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
580
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of the
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
Related information
Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 190)
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
(p. 582)
Roof load and loading on load carriers
(p. 580)
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 451)
Weights (p. 653)
Roof load and loading on load
carriers
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are availa-
ble for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers.
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
Follow the car's specifications with regard to
weights and maximum permitted load.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Weights (p. 653)
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
581
Bag hooks
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre-
vent them from overturning and spreading their
contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
There are two bag hooks in the side panel on
each side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Under the floor hatch*
There are two bag hooks and an elastic strap
3
in
the cover, which is part of the floor hatch in the
cargo area. The strap can be fitted in four differ-
ent positions.
Lift up the cover in order to use the bag hooks.
Fasten the bags in a suitable position with the
enclosed elastic strap. If the bags have handles
and are a suitable height - hang them in the
hooks.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Fitting and removing the safety net*
(p. 586)
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)
Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 584)
Load retaining eyelets
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Weights (p. 653)
3
It is possible to reorder additional elastic straps at a Volvo retailer.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
582
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and
fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking* function is used then the
hatch must be closed.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Private locking (p. 275)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
Fitting and removing cargo cover*
In the extended position, the cargo cover pre-
vents visual access to the cargo area.
Fitting cargo cover
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in
the recess in the side panel in the cargo
area.
Then insert the other end piece in the recess
in the side panel on the opposite side.
Press down the end pieces on both sides -
one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
ing on each end piece has disappeared,
the cargo cover is attached - check that it
is affixed securely.
4. Fold the cargo cover's front panel forward to
eliminate the space between the cargo cover
and the rear seat's backrests.
IMPORTANT
The cover plate has two plastic parts that act
as support to hold it in place.
The plastic parts must not be used to hang
bags on. They are not designed for this pur-
pose and may break.
If the safety net* shall be used at the same time
as the cargo cover then the safety net must be
fitted first.
Removing cargo cover
In retracted position:
1. Depress the button on one of the retracted
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
end.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
* Option/accessory.
583
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically
and the cover can be lifted out of the
cargo area.
Related information
Operating cargo cover* (p. 583)
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Operating cargo cover*
There are two extended positions for the cargo
cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
ier to reach further into the cargo area.
Full-cover position
1. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
so that it slides over the side panels in the
cargo area. Pull to the end position.
2. Guide the cover's attachment pins into the
grooves in the side panels. Release, while at
the same time angling the handle slightly
upwards so that the attachment pins hook in.
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover
position.
Loading mode
From the full-cover position:
Grasp the handle and pull it back until it
stops.
Angle the cover down.
Move the cover and its attachment pins care-
fully forward and up over the hooks.
> The cover retracts until it stops in the
loading position.
Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-
tion:
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins hook into the hooks.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi-
tion.
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
584
With an automatic* cargo cover, the cover will be
retracted from full-cover position to loading posi-
tion every time the tailgate is opened, and
extended again when the tailgate is closed. The
cargo cover detects if something is obstructing
its movement and then retracts automatically.
WARNING
Pay attention to the risk of crushing when
opening and closing with the automatic*
cargo cover.
IMPORTANT
Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover.
IMPORTANT
If the cargo area is loaded with a bulky load
then the automatic* cargo cover is moved to
retracted position in order to avoid it making
contact with the load.
NOTE
The cargo cover may not operate automati-
cally in low passenger compartment tempera-
tures.
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position:
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins
and then release.
From loading position:
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then
release.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position.
Remember that a retracted cargo cover may
obstruct rearward visibility.
Related information
Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 582)
Fitting and removing safety grilles*
The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment.
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
Volvo's strength requirements.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be attached and anchored correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
585
Installation
IMPORTANT
The safety grille must only be used in the rear
position (behind the rear seat) described
here.
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that
replacing roof mountings is performed at an
authorised Volvo workshop or retailer.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
through one of the rear side doors.
3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people hold
the safety grille in the right position.
4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using
the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
other side. Recommended tightening torque:
20 Nm (15 foot-pounds).
> Check that the safety grille is properly fit-
ted.
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
tion instructions
4
that were included with the ini-
tial purchase.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
4
Installation instructions no. 31659257.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
* Option/accessory.
586
Fitting and removing the safety net*
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always
be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
Fitting the safety net
Rear fitting
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrests for-
ward in order to facilitate installation.
2. Lower the safety net cassette's end pieces
over the mounting eyelets in the recess of
the side panels. Press down the end piece
one side at a time. Check that the cassette is
properly secured.
3. Pull up the net.
4. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the rear roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
5. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it for-
ward to the end position.
Front fitting
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Align the safety net cassette's anchor rails in
front of the backrest's attachment lugs.
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment lugs.
4. Pull up the net.
5. Hook one of the safety net's retaining hooks
into the front roof mounting and then press it
forward to the end position.
6. Hook the other of the safety net's retaining
hooks on the opposite side and press it for-
ward to the end position.
Removing the safety net
1. Undo the safety net from the roof mountings
by pressing the retaining hooks backwards.
Allow the net to roll into the cassette.
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
}}
587
2.
Rear fitting:
Press the button on each side of the cas-
sette in order to release the end pieces from
the mounting eyelets. Lift out the safety net.
Front fitting:
Slide the cassette from the attachment lugs
and lift out the safety net.
Related information
Recommendations for loading (p. 579)
Load retaining eyelets (p. 581)
First aid kit
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit in the space on the right-
hand side of the cargo area.
Related information
Cargo area (p. 579)
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located under the panel
on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
||
LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
588
Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
and then unhooking the panel. Place the
panel to one side.
Open the latch and take out the case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
Cargo area (p. 579)
Hazard warning flashers (p. 158)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
590
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and mainte-
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
Car status (p. 592)
Book service and repair (p. 592)
Connection of equipment to the car's diag-
nostic socket (p. 38)
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 598)
Brake system maintenance (p. 427)
Engine compartment overview (p. 599)
Data transfer between car and
workshop via Wi-Fi
Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network
for secure data transfer between your car and
the workshop. Your workshop visit will be sim-
pler and more efficient when the transfer of diag-
nostic information and software can take place
via the workshop's network.
When you reach the workshop for your visit, your
technician may want to connect your car to the
workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault-
tracing and software download. For this type of
communication, the car only connects to the
workshop's network. It is therefore not possible
to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such
as at home, but only the workshop's specific net-
work.
Manual connection to the workshop
Manual connection is normally handled by the
service technician. The technician uses your
remote control key's buttons to connect the car,
which is why it is important to bring a key with
buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press
three times on the lock button on the remote
control key to connect the car to the workshop's
network via Wi-Fi.
When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network,
the
symbol appears in the centre display.
WARNING
The car must not be driven when connected
to the workshop's networks and systems.
Related information
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Book service and repair (p. 592)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
591
Download Center
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car
1
.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
searching for and updating system software
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.
Related information
Managing system updates via the Download
Centre (p. 591)
Downloading apps (p. 494)
Updating apps (p. 495)
Deleting apps (p. 496)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Managing system updates via the
Download Centre
System updates are intended for the online and
infotainment components in the car. If system
software updates are available, the updates can
be made all at once or one at a time.
Searching for update
For system updates to be pos-
sible, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet
2
.
System updates are handled
via the
Download Centre app
in the centre display's applica-
tion view. If no search for available updates has
been performed since the last time the infotain-
ment system was started, a search is performed.
No search is performed if a software installation
is in progress. A number on the System
updates button shows how many updates are
available. A tap on the button shows a list of the
updates that can be installed in the car. If an
update is available, the New software updates
available message is also shown in the centre
display's status bar.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the igni-
tion is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next time
the car is used.
Update all system software
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then the
Install all option can
be selected at the
System updates
button
instead.
Update individual system software
programs
Select Install for the software required.
1
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
2
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
592
Cancelling software download
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced the button
Install at the start of the
download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this can-
not be cancelled.
Deactivating the background search for
software update
Automatic background search for software
updates is activated when the car is delivered
from the factory, but this function can be deacti-
vated.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2. Press
System Download Centre.
3.
Deselect
Auto Software Update.
Related information
Download Center (p. 591)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Car status
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to book
service
3
.
The Car status app is started
from app view in the centre dis-
play and has four tabs:
Messages - status messages
Status - checking the oil level
TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
Appointments - appointment information
and car information
3
.
Related information
Handling a message saved from the driver
display (p. 103)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 601)
Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 552)
Book service and repair (p. 592)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 594)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Book service and repair
4
This service provides a convenient way to book
a service and workshop visit directly in the car.
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message will
appear in the driver display and at the top of the
centre display. The service date is determined by
how much time has passed, hours that the
engine has been running, or distance driven
since the last service.
3
Applies to certain markets.
4
Applies to certain markets.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
593
Before the service can be used
Create a Volvo ID and register the Volvo ID
to the car.
Select the Volvo retailer you would like to
contact by going to www.volvocars.com and
logging in.
To send and receive booking information, the
car must be connected to the Internet
5
.
Book a service
When you decide to book a service from your car,
the information will be sent via you Internet con-
nection
5
.
Fill in the appointment request when desired or
when a message stating that service or repairs
are needed is shown in the driver display and at
the top of the centre display.
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Request appointment button.
4.
Make sure that the correct
Volvo ID is filled
in.
5.
Make sure that the desired
Workshop is
filled in.
6.
Fill in the field
Tap to write information to
the workshop if there is anything you would
like done during the workshop visit or any
other important information to your work-
shop.
7.
Press the
Send appointment request but-
ton.
> You will receive an appointment sugges-
tion to your car within a couple of days
6
.
You will also receive the same communi-
cation via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent the
appointment request, the message that
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display.
8.
Press the
Cancel request button to cancel
your request.
The booking enquiry sent from the car includes
car information that facilitates workshop planning.
The retailer comes back with a digital booking
proposal. You also have information on your
retailer available in the car and can contact your
workshop at any time.
Accept the appointment suggestion
When the car has received an appointment sug-
gestion, a message will be shown at the top of
the centre display.
1. Tap the message.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
on the
Accept button. Otherwise press
either of the Send new proposal or
Decline buttons.
For certain markets, the system reminds you of a
scheduled appointment time as it approaches
and the navigation system
7
can also guide you to
the workshop when the time comes.
Related information
Car status (p. 592)
Sending car information to a workshop
(p. 594)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Volvo ID (p. 26)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
5
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
6
This time frame may vary depending on market.
7
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
594
Sending car information to a
workshop
8
It is possible to send information for the car at
any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appoint-
ment and want to help your workshop by provid-
ing them with better data so that your visit can
be planned. Sending car information is not the
same as booking a service appointment.
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Send car data button.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre dis-
play. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
The information is sent via the car's Inter-
net connection
9
.
This car information can be accessed by any
retailer if they have the car's identification num-
ber (VIN
10
).
Car information content
The data sent is the last information saved (the
last time the car was running) and includes infor-
mation in the following areas:
service requirement
time since last service
function status
fluid levels
meter reading
the car's vehicle identification number
(VIN
10
)
the car's software version
the car's diagnostics data.
Related information
Book service and repair (p. 592)
Car status (p. 592)
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 111)
Internet-connected car* (p. 526)
8
Applies to certain markets.
9
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
10
Vehicle Identification Number.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
595
Raise the car
When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit-
ted, must be switched off before the car is raised.
Deactivating the function via the centre display.
WARNING
If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this
must be placed beneath one of the four jack-
ing points. Take care to position the workshop
jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure
that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard
so that the car remains stable and is not dam-
aged. Always use axle stands or similar.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
596
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
Related information
Removing a wheel (p. 559)
Jack* (p. 557)
Settings for level control* (p. 453)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
597
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
the passenger compartment and a handle under
the bonnet.
Open the bonnet
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed posi-
tion.
Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlock-
wise to release the bonnet from the lock
catches and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
When the bonnet is released, the warn-
ing symbol and the graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Close the bonnet
1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
Bonnet not completely closed. The figure is schematic -
parts may vary depending on car model.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
598
Bonnet completely closed. The figure is schematic -
parts may vary depending on car model.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi-
ately and close it.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 599)
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48)
Servicing the climate control system
The air conditioning system must only be serv-
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur-
ing leak detection.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Related information
Volvo service programme (p. 590)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
599
Head-up display when replacing the
windscreen*
Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop when replacing the wind-
screen. The correct version of the windscreen
must be fitted in order that the head-up display's
graphics shall be displayed correctly.
Related information
Head-up display* (p. 138)
Cleaning the head up display* (p. 629)
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related com-
ponents.
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv-
er's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe
11
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start or continue to operate
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high and
hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
work is being performed in the engine com-
partment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 597)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Topping up coolant (p. 602)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 618)
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 601)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
11
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
600
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals and war-
ranty can be applied.
Volvo recommends:
If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular
basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk
that this will cause serious damage to the engine.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems to warn about the
oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low
oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil
pressure sensor, and then the driver display's
warning symbol for low oil pressure
is
used. Other variants have an oil level sensor,
when the driver is informed via the driver display's
warning symbol
and display texts. Certain
variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo
retailer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than
specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in
adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an
oil of a higher grade than the one specified.
Related information
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 601)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 657)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 659)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
601
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Filler pipe
12
.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver
display.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message
Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
such as
Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
See oil level in the centre display
The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the car
has been started. The oil level should be checked
regularly.
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press
Status to show the oil level.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
on level ground before the oil level indication
is correct.
12
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
602
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, then the message
No value available
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in
the car's systems.
Related information
Engine oil (p. 600)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 659)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 657)
Ignition positions (p. 422)
Car status (p. 592)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
partment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx.
2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery
to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a
defective cooling system when attempting to
start the car.
WARNING
The coolant may be very hot. Never open the
cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is
required, unscrew the expansion tank cap
slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
603
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion
tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the
hatch from the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if
necessary. The coolant level must not exceed
the yellow MAX mark inside the expansion
tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
IMPORTANT
Mix the coolant with approved quality
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
Make sure that the coolant mixture is
50% water and 50% coolant.
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
Only new coolant should be used when
replacing major cooling system compo-
nents to ensure the system has sufficient
corrosion protection.
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 599)
Coolant — specifications (p. 660)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
604
Bulb replacement
The bulb in the halogen headlamp, reversing
lamp and rear fog lamp can be replaced without
assistance from a workshop.
Halogen headlamps are not available for all
models and markets. Contact a Volvo retailer for
more information.
An LED
13
type lamp must be replaced by a
workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi-
fied Volvo service technician.
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced without the help of a workshop, but the
plastic cover over the headlamp must be removed
before a bulb can be replaced.
Contact a workshop
14
if faults other than bulbs
occur in lamps. If a fault occurs in LED
13
lamps,
the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 606)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 607)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 608)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb (p. 609)
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb (p. 610)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
13
LED (Ligth Emitting Diode)
14
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
605
Removing the plastic cover for bulb
replacement
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced without the help of a workshop, but the
plastic cover over the headlamp must be
removed before a bulb can be replaced.
Press down the pins into the plastic cover's
four clips using a screwdriver or similar and
lift away the cover.
NOTE
Points to remember when the cover is refit-
ted:
The pin in the clip needs to be pressed
back fully before the clip is refitted in the
cover.
When the cover is refitted, the pin must
be pressed in until the end surface is
level with the surface of the clip.
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 604)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 606)
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 607)
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 607)
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 608)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Exterior lamp positions
The exterior lighting of the car uses a number of
different lamps. An LED
15
type lamp must be
replaced by a workshop. An authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Lamps, front (car with halogen
headlamps)
Dipped beam
Main beam
Daytime running lights/position lamps
Indicator
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED
15
)
15
LED (Light Emmitting Diod)
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
606
Lamps, rear
Position lamps (LED)
15
Position lamps (LED)
Fog lamp
Reversing lamp
Indicator
16
Brake light (LED)
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
Related information
Bulb replacement (p. 604)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Lighting control (p. 148)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
The dipped beam bulb in the halogen headlamp
can be replaced without assistance from a work-
shop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
dipped beam bulb.
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
and pulling it straight out.
4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide
pin must be aimed straight upwards.
5. Press in the connector.
6. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
15
LED (Light Emmitting Diod)
16
Contact a workshop for replacement - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
607
Replacing the main beam lamp
The main beam bulb in the halogen headlamp
can be replaced without assistance from a work-
shop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
main beam bulb.
2. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
3. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea-
ses.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb.
6. Fit the bulb in the socket and screw in.
7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
The daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb in the halogen headlamp can be replaced
without assistance from a workshop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
NOTE
The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
608
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
daytime running light bulb/position lamp
bulb.
2. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
6. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in.
7. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Replacing the front direction
indicator bulb
The direction indicator bulb in the halogen head-
lamp can be replaced without assistance from a
workshop.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's rubber cover for the
indicator bulb.
2. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
3. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
5. Refit the headlamp's rubber cover.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
609
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Replacing the reversing lamp bulb
The bulbs for the reversing lamp are located
behind the panel in the tailgate.
1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise and then unhooking the panel.
Place the panel to one side.
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it anticlock-
wise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in and
turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
5. Attach the bulb holder by turning it clock-
wise.
6. Hook on the panel and turn the knobs a
quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Removing the plastic cover for bulb replace-
ment (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
610
Replacing the rear fog lamp bulb
The bulb for the rear fog lamp is located behind
a hatch in the tailgate panel on the driver's side.
The rear fog lamp bulb is replaced as follows:
The tailgate's inner panel.
1. Detach the panel on the inside of the tailgate
by first turning the two knobs a quarter turn
anticlockwise. Then unhook the panel and
place it to one side.
Lamp housing on left-hand side.
2. Undo the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn anticlockwise and pulling it out.
3. Remove the blown bulb from the bulb holder
by pressing it in and turning anticlockwise.
4. Fit a new bulb by pressing it in and turning it
clockwise.
5. Wipe the bulb's lens clean of any dirt, grease
or moisture.
6. Attach the bulb holder by turning it a quarter
turn clockwise.
7. Refit the panel and lock it on by turning the
knobs a quarter turn clockwise.
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Bulb specifications (p. 610)
Bulb specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs in the halogen
headlamps as well as the reversing lamp bulb
and the rear fog lamp bulb.
Contact a workshop
17
if faults occur in other
lamps.
Function
W
A
Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PY24W
daytime running lights/
position lamps, front
21/5 W21/5W
Reversing lamp 21 H21W LL
Rear fog lamp 21 H21W LL
A
Watt
Related information
Exterior lamp positions (p. 605)
Bulb replacement (p. 604)
17
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
611
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is used to start up the electri-
cal system and drive the starter motor as well as
other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop
18
.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The starter battery is a 12 V battery, designed for
the carbon dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop
and regenerative charging, and to support the
functionality of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi-
tions, climatic conditions etc.
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
Never smoke near the battery.
Charging points
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points in
the engine compartment.
The battery terminals on the car's starter battery
in the luggage/cargo area must not be used.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
Positive charging point
Negative charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
18
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
612
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotain-
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
the message in the driver display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
Location
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
WARNING
If the starter battery is disconnected, the
automatic opening and closing function must
be reset to work properly. A reset must take
place for pinch protection to work.
IMPORTANT
On certain models, the battery is attached
with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining
strap is properly tightened.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
613
Specifications
Battery H7 AGM H8 AGM
Voltage (V) 12 12
Cold start capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
800 850
Size, L×B×H 315×175×190 mm (12.4×6.9×7.5 inches) 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 80 95
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace-
ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
19
type must be fit-
ted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the origi-
nal battery.
Related information
Symbols on the batteries (p. 615)
Support battery (p. 614)
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 471)
19
Absorbed Glass Mat.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
614
Support battery
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support bat-
tery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support bat-
tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut
tower.
NOTE
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is dis-
engaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
The engine starts automatically
20
without the
driver depressing the clutch pedal (manual
gearbox).
The engine starts automatically without the
driver lifting his/her foot off the foot brake
pedal (automatic gearbox).
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A work-
shop should be contacted in the event of ques-
tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external starter battery or battery charger:
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
20
Automatic starting can only take place if the gear lever is in neutral position.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
615
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function may continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of approx.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging time
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommenda-
tion is to charge the battery using an external
battery charger.
Specifications
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
-
CCA
B
(A)
170
Size, L×B×H
150×90×130 mm
(5.9×3.5×5.1
inches)
Capacity (Ah) 10
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
21
type must be fit-
ted.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 611)
Start/Stop function (p. 446)
Symbols on the batteries (p. 615)
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
21
Absorbed Glass Mat.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
616
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support bat-
tery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
Starter battery (p. 611)
Support battery (p. 614)
Fuses and central electrical units
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Location of central electrical units
The figure is schematic - appearance may vary depend-
ing on car model.
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Related information
Replacing a fuse (p. 617)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 624)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 618)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 621)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
617
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
WARNING
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about
the fuses not mentioned in the owner's man-
ual. If this is not performed correctly, it can
cause serious damage to the electrical sys-
tems.
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 616)
Fuses in cargo area (p. 624)
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 618)
Fuses under glovebox (p. 621)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
618
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
619
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are of
the "Micro" type.
Fuses 14-17, 31-34 and 38-45 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
22
.
Function
A
A
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark
plugs (petrol)
15
Solenoid for engine oil pump;
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda
sond, rear (diesel)
15
Function
A
A
Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve
for output pulse (diesel)
7,5
Engine control module; Actuator;
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel);
Position sensor for turbo (die-
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
rol)
20
Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther-
mostat for engine cooling sys-
tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump
(diesel); Glow control module
(diesel)
10
Control module for spoiler roller
cover; Control module for radia-
tor roller cover; Relay coils for
output pulse (diesel)
5
Lambda-sond, front; Lambda-
sond, rear (petrol)
15
Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
Starter motor 40
Function
A
A
Starter motor Shunt
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
12 V socket in tunnel console,
front
15
12 V socket in tunnel console,
by legroom for second seat row
15
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
22
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
620
Function
A
A
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
Shunt
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
40
Headlamp washers*
25
Windscreen washers 25
Transmission control module 15
Horn 20
Siren*
5
Control module for brake system
(valves, parking brake)
40
Windscreen wipers 30
Rear window washer 25
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
40
Parking heater*
20
Control unit for brake system
(ABS pump)
40
Function
A
A
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
Shunt
Supplied when the ignition is
switched on: Engine control
module; Transmission compo-
nents; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module; Con-
trol module for brake system
5
Right-hand headlamp 7,5
Right-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
Alcohol lock 5
Module for controlling battery
engagement
5
Airbags 5
Left-hand headlamp 7,5
Left-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
A
Ampere
B
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 616)
Replacing a fuse (p. 617)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
621
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, electrical sockets, displays and
door modules.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
622
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
Positions
Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are
of the "Micro" type.
Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
23
.
Function
A
A
Electrical socket in tunnel console,
by legroom for rear seat*
30
Movement detector*
5
Media player 5
Driver display 5
Keypad in centre console 5
Sun sensor 5
Function
A
A
Steering wheel module 5
Module for start knob and for park-
ing brake control
5
Steering wheel module for heated
steering wheel*
15
Control module for climate control
system
10
Steering lock 7,5
Diagnostic socket OBDII 10
Centre display 5
Fan module for climate control sys-
tem, front
40
Function
A
A
USB HUB 5
Controls lighting; Interior lighting;
Dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad
in tunnel console, by legroom for
rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con-
trol panels in rear doors; Fan mod-
ule for climate control left/right
7,5
Control module for driver support
functions
5
Panorama roof with sun blind*
20
Head-up display*
5
Passenger compartment lighting 5
Display in roof console (Seatbelt
reminder/Indicator for airbag on
the front passenger seat)
5
Humidity sensor 5
Door module in right-hand rear
door
20
23
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
623
Function
A
A
Fuses in cargo area 10
Control module for online car; Con-
trol module for Volvo On Call
5
Door module in left-hand rear door 20
Audio control module (amplifier)
(certain variants)
40
Module for multi-band antenna 5
Modules for seat comfort (mas-
sage) front*
5
Alcohol lock 5
Rear window wiper 15
Control module for fuel pump 15
Seat heating, driver's side front 15
Seat heating, passenger side front 15
Coolant pump 10
Function
A
A
Door module in left-hand front door 20
Control module for suspension
(active chassis)*
20
Sensus control module 10
Door module in right-hand front
door
20
TV* (certain markets)
5
Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
A
Ampere
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 616)
Replacing a fuse (p. 617)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
624
Fuses in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other
things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten-
sioners.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
625
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
626
Positions
Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"
type.
Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
24
.
Function
A
A
Rear window defroster 30
Compressor for air suspension*
40
Lock motor for backrest on rear
right-hand side
15
Lock motor for backrest on rear
left-hand side
15
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
Power operated tailgate*
25
Electrically operated front passen-
ger seat*
20
Function
A
A
Towbar control module*
40
Seatbelt pretensioner module,
right-hand side
40
Internal relay coils 5
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Module for detecting foot move-
ment* (for opening the power oper-
ated tailgate)
5
Alcohol lock, USB hub/accessory
port
5
Towbar control module*
25
Power driver seat*
20
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-
hand side
40
Parking camera*
5
Function
A
A
Control module for airbags and
seatbelt tensioners
5
Seat heating left-hand side rear*
15
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*:
control module, exterior reversing
sound
5
USB port in cargo area 5
Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol,
certain engine variants)
5
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control
module*
15
24
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
627
Function
A
A
Seat heating right-hand side rear*
15
A
Ampere
Related information
Fuses and central electrical units (p. 616)
Replacing a fuse (p. 617)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
628
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or
concentrated alcohol to clean the interior,
since this may damage the upholstery as
well as other interior materials.
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical but-
tons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Related information
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and readability.
Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
cloth.
To clean the centre display:
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press
on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. The screen should be
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
629
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
play.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning the head up display*
Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a
clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
ing agent available from Volvo retailers can be
used for more difficult cleaning.
Related information
Activating and deactivating the head-up dis-
play* (p. 140)
Head-up display* (p. 138)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
630
Cleaning fabric upholstery and
headlining
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain
removers since this risks destroying the colour of
the upholstery.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning the seatbelts
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by Volvo retailers.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
631
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning leather upholstery
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Leather upholstery*
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective cream
one to four times per year (or more if required).
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from
Volvo retailers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge
and squeeze until a foam is created.
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain
without scrubbing.
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the
leather to dry thoroughly
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
leather in light circular motions.
2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more
resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radia-
tion.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
(p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
632
Cleaning the leather steering wheel
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We
recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove
dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
leather on the steering wheel.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood
parts (p. 632)
Cleaning interior plastic, metal and
wood parts
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois-
tened with water, available from Volvo retailers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur-
faces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
IMPORTANT
Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are
easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a
clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular
motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre
cloth with a little clean water.
Related information
Cleaning the interior (p. 628)
Cleaning the centre display (p. 628)
Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining
(p. 630)
Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 630)
Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 630)
Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 631)
Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 632)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
633
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
does not need to be polished until it is at least
one year old. However, the car can be waxed
during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
direct sunlight, the surface being polished
should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint-
work damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
634
Handwashing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
The following steps are good to remember when
washing the car:
Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
have an abrasive effect.
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discolouration.
Wash the underbody, including wheel hous-
ings and bumpers.
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of
water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce
the risk of water drying stains which may
need to be polished out.
After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
rid of the last spots after the car has been
washed.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the panoramic roof and
sun visor are closed before washing the
car.
Never use polishing agent with abrasive
properties on the panoramic roof.
Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
around the panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and in the sills after wash-
ing the car.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
635
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Automatic car wash
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh.
Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
matic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the car is not washed
in an automatic car wash during the first few
months (this is because the paintwork has
not fully hardened).
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic
braking when stationary and automatic park-
ing brake application. If these functions are
not deactivated, the brake system will jam
when the car is stationary and the car will not
be able to move.
IMPORTANT
For car washes where the car is pulled for-
ward with rolling wheels, the following applies:
1. Before washing the car, make sure that
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated,
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
and damaging the wiper arms.
2. Make sure that the door mirrors are
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
they risk being damaged by the auto-
matic car wash.
3. Drive into the car wash.
4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at
standstill" function using the switch on
the tunnel console.
5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake
application" function via the top view of
the centre display.
6. Switch off the engine by turning the start
knob in the tunnel console clockwise.
Hold the knob in place for at least
2 seconds.
The car is ready for the car wash.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
636
Handwashing (p. 634)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
High-pressure washing
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the
surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the
locks.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Cleaning the wiper blades
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
637
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and
trim components
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
retailers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
using such a cleaning agent the instructions
must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
discolouration of anodised aluminium compo-
nents*, as illustrated. We advise against use of
abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
638
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano-
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura-
tion and destroy the surface treatment.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Cleaning wheel rims
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur-
face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi-
nium rims.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Rustproofing (p. 638)
Rustproofing
The car has effective protection against corro-
sion.
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of
metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a
high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected
and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plas-
tic components, abrasion protection and supple-
mental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the
chassis, exposed components of the wheel sus-
pension are made of corrosion-resistant cast alu-
minium.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur-
ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the
car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com-
ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
Cleaning the exterior (p. 633)
Polishing and waxing (p. 633)
Handwashing (p. 634)
Automatic car wash (p. 635)
High-pressure washing (p. 636)
Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 636)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
639
Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components (p. 637)
Cleaning wheel rims (p. 638)
Car paintwork
The paintwork consists of several layers and is
an important part of the car's rustproofing, and
should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the
onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rec-
tified immediately.
Related information
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 639)
Colour codes (p. 641)
Touching up minor paintwork
damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof-
ing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
When repairing paint damage, the car must be
clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
When repairing the paintwork, it must be
clean and dry and at a temperature of at least
15°C.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
640
Materials that may be needed
Primer
25
- a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
26
.
Masking tape.
fine sand paper
25
.
If the damage has not reached down to the
metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly
after the surface has been cleaned.
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface
should be at least 15 °C (60 °F).
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray
into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
For scratches, proceed as described above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
from Volvo retailers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
Car paintwork (p. 639)
Colour codes (p. 641)
25
If required.
26
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
641
Colour codes
Colour code
The colour code label is located on the car's
right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible
when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
Related information
Car paintwork (p. 639)
Touching up minor paintwork damage
(p. 639)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear
window
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower
section of the blade to the right.
1.
Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it
from the windscreen to lock position.
NOTE
There is a lock position at half extension
angle that may feel like resistance, this lock
prevents the arm from falling back against the
windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled
past the lock for wiper blade replacement.
2.
Grip the lower part of the blade and pull
to the right until the blade loosens from the
arm.
3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
4. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
642
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
(p. 642)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing a windscreen wiper blade
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position. Service position is activated/deacti-
vated via the function view in the centre dis-
play when the car is stationary and the wind-
screen wipers are not on. Press the button
located on the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is
heard.
3. Check that the blade is firmly installed.
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
The wiper blades are different lengths.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
643
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Wiper blades in service position
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position (vertical position) when, for example,
they are being replaced.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated when
the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers
are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated
via the function view in the centre display:
Press the
Wiper Service
Position button. The light indi-
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
guishes when the service position is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit service position if:
Windscreen wiping is activated.
Windscreen washing is activated.
Rain sensor activated.
The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the activation of wiping, wash-
ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv-
ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
644
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Filling washer fluid (p. 644)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point.
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir
with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for wind-
screen washer, rear window washer and head-
lamp washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid
remains in the reservoir, the message
Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in
the driver display, together with the
symbol.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres (5.8
qts).
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres
(3.7 qts).
Related information
Using the rain sensor (p. 176)
Using windscreen and headlamp washers
(p. 178)
Using automatic rear windscreen wiping
when reversing (p. 180)
Heated windscreen wiper nozzles* (p. 176)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
645
Using the rain sensor's memory function
(p. 177)
Using the rear window wiper and washer
(p. 179)
Wiper blades in service position (p. 643)
Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 642)
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
(p. 641)
Using windscreen wipers (p. 175)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
648
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model.
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo retailer regar-
ding the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
649
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica-
tion number, permissible maximum weights and
code designation for exterior colour and type
approval number. The decal is positioned on the
door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
number.
Label for engine oil.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
650
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Related information
Air conditioning — specifications (p. 661)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
651
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm inches
A Ground clear-
ance
A
198 7.8
B Wheelbase 2941 115,8
C Length 4939 194,4
D Load length,
floor, folded
seat
1988 78,3
Dimensions mm inches
E Load length,
floor
1153 45,4
F Height 1543 60,7
G Load height 704 27,7
H Front track
1652
B
1655
C
65,0
B
65,2
C
Dimensions mm inches
I Rear track
1643
B
1645
C
64,7
B
64,8
C
J Load width,
floor
1130 44,5
K Width 1903
(1879
D
)
74,9
(74,0
D
)
||
SPECIFICATIONS
652
Dimensions mm inches
L Width includ-
ing door mir-
rors
2052 80,8
M Width includ-
ing folded-in
door mirrors
1929 75,9
A
For kerb weight + 2 people. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
B
Applies to cars with 18/19 inch wheels.
C
Applies to cars with 20/21 inch wheels.
D
Body width.
Related information
Weights (p. 653)
SPECIFICATIONS
653
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb
weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 654)
SPECIFICATIONS
654
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is
recommended for trailers heavier than 1800
kg.
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T5 AWD B4204T20 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
T5 AWD B4204T26 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
T6 AWD B4204T27 Automatic
1800
B
2500
C
130
T6 AWD B4204T29 Automatic
1800
B
2500
C
130
D4 AWD D4204T14 Manual select
1800
B
2200
C
130
SPECIFICATIONS
* Option/accessory.
655
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic
1800
B
2400
C
130
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic
1800
B
2500
C
130
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
B
Applies to cars that are not equipped for a higher towing weight.
C
Applies to cars that are equipped for a higher towing weight.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of
100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is lim-
ited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal
requirements for the vehicle combination,
such as speed, etc. must be observed.
Max. weight unbraked trailer
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
750 50
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Weights (p. 653)
Driving with a trailer (p. 476)
Trailer stability assist* (p. 477)
SPECIFICATIONS
656
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be found in the
table below.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Max. rated power
(kW/rpm)
Max. rated power
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 350/1500-4500 4
T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 208/5500 282/5500 350/1500–4800 4
T5 AWD B4204T26 184/5500 250/5500 350/1800-4800 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4
T6 AWD B4204T29 228/5700 310/5700 400/2200-5100 4
D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4
D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 480/1750-2250 4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Engine oil — specifications (p. 657)
Coolant — specifications (p. 660)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
657
Engine oil — specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine code
A
Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 AWD B4204T20 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6
T5 AWD B4204T23 approx. 5.6
T5 AWD B4204T26 approx. 5.6
T6 AWD B4204T27 approx. 5.6
T6 AWD B4204T29 approx. 5.6
D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2
D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
658
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 659)
Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 601)
Engine oil (p. 600)
SPECIFICATIONS
659
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long jour-
neys:
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F)
or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F).
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Engine oil — specifications (p. 657)
Engine oil (p. 600)
SPECIFICATIONS
660
Coolant — specifications
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water
1
, see the packag-
ing. Consult a Volvo retailer if unsure.
To avoid health risks, different types of glycol
must not be mixed.
Related information
Topping up coolant (p. 602)
Transmission fluid — specifications
Under normal driving conditions, the transmis-
sion fluid does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, it may be necessary in
adverse driving conditions.
Manual gearbox
Prescribed transmission
fluid:
BOT 350M3
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid:
AW1
Brake fluid — specifications
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres-
sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
Engine compartment overview (p. 599)
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
661
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the
table below.
All models
Litres (approx.) 60
US gallons (approx.) 15,9
Related information
Filling fuel (p. 459)
Tank capacity for AdBlue
®2
The refillable tank capacity for the additive
AdBlue is approx. 11.5 litres.
Related information
Checking and filling with AdBlue® (p. 466)
Air conditioning — specifications
The car's climate control system uses a freon-
free refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about which
refrigerant the car's climate control system uses
is printed on a decal located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
2
Registered trademark that belongs to Ver-band der Automobilindustrie e.V. (VDA)
||
SPECIFICATIONS
662
Decal for R1234yf
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
Symbol Meaning
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Refrigerant
Cars with R134a refrigerant
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
Weight Prescribed grade
650 g R1234yf
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
60 ml (2.03 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Related information
Servicing the climate control system (p. 598)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
663
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured
in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions are
measured in gram CO2 per km.
Explanation
gram CO
2
/km
litres/100 km
urban driving
motorway driving
mixed driving
manual gearbox
automatic gearbox
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is miss-
ing then it is included in the enclosed supple-
ment.
T5 AWD (B4204T26)
211 9.2 142 6,2 167 7,3
T6 AWD (B4204T29)
225 9,9 149 6,6 177 7.8
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
159 6,1 120 4,6 134 5,1
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
162 6,2 124 4,7 138 5,2
D5 AWD (D4204T23)
159 6,1 128 4,9 139 5,3
The fuel consumption and emission values in the
above table are based on special EU driving
cycles (see below), which apply for cars with kerb
weight in basic version and without extra equip-
ment. The car's weight may increase depending
on its equipment level. This, along with how heav-
||
SPECIFICATIONS
664
ily the car is loaded, increases its fuel consump-
tion and CO2 emissions.
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
that is higher than the values in the table. Exam-
ples of these include:
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects its weight.
Driving style.
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic ver-
sion of the model, as this could increase roll-
ing resistance.
High speed causes increased air resistance.
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel consump-
tion if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see
below), which are used in the certification of the
car and on which consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the referenced regulations.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
EU driving cycles
The official fuel consumption figures are based
on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory
environment ("EU driving cycles"), all in accord-
ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and
715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6), 2017/1151 and
2017/1153. Since the driving cycles are also
used for quality control, there are stringent
requirements for test repeatability. Testing is
therefore conducted in a controlled manner and
only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air condi-
tioning, radio, etc. switched off). The results of the
official figures are therefore not naturally repre-
sentative of what the customer sees in actual
use.
The regulations cover the driving cycles "Urban
driving" and "Motorway driving":
Urban driving – the measurement starts
with a cold start of the engine. The driving is
simulated.
Motorway driving – the car is accelerated
and braked at speed of 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
The official value for mixed driving, which is
shown in the table, is a combination of the results
from the "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving"
driving cycles in accordance with legal require-
ments.
To determine the carbon dioxide emissions (CO
2
emissions) during the two driving cycles, the
exhaust gases were collected. These were then
analysed to determine the value for CO
2
emis-
sions.
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Weights (p. 653)
Economical driving (p. 456)
SPECIFICATIONS
665
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or other
documents. The following table shows all
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
= Approved
Engine man/
aut
235/55R18
7,5x18x50,5
235/50R19
7,5x19x50,5
245/45R20
8x20x49.5
245/40R21
8x21x49.5
T5 AWD (B4204T20) aut
T5 AWD (B4204T23) aut
T5 AWD (B4204T26) aut
T6 AWD (B4204T27) aut
T6 AWD (B4204T29) aut
D4 AWD (D4204T14) man
D4 AWD (D4204T14) aut
D5 AWD (D4204T23) aut
Related information
Lowest permitted tyre load index and speed
rating for tyres (p. 666)
Type designations (p. 648)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 548)
SPECIFICATIONS
666
Lowest permitted tyre load index
and speed rating for tyres
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine man/
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)
A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)
B
T5 AWD B4204T20 aut 96 V
T5 AWD B4204T23 aut 96 V
T5 AWD B4204T26 aut 96 V
T6 AWD B4204T27 aut 96 V
T6 AWD B4204T29 aut 96 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 man 96 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 96 V
D5 AWD D4204T23 aut 96 V
A
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
Approved tyre pressures (p. 667)
Type designations (p. 648)
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 547)
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 548)
SPECIFICATIONS
667
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna-
tive can be found in the table.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
All engines
235/55 R18
235/50 R19
245/45 R20
245/40 R21
0-160 km/h (0-100 mph) 240 240 260 260 260
160+ km/h (100+ mph) 250 250 280 280
Temporary Spare Tyre max 80 km/h (max 50 mph) 420 420 420 420
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Related information
Type designations (p. 648)
Checking tyre pressure (p. 550)
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 665)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
669
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 441
A
A/C (Air conditioning) 225
ABS
anti-lock brakes 425
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 306, 309,
310, 311, 312, 313, 315, 316, 317, 318, 320
Accessories and extra equipment 37
installation 37
Active bending lights 156
Active main beam 153
Active Park Assist 411, 412, 415, 416,
417, 418
function 411, 412, 416, 417, 418
Limitations 416
operation 412, 415
Symbols and messages 418
Active Yaw Control 286
Adapting driving characteristics 284, 441
Adaptive Cruise Control 306, 309, 310,
311, 312, 313, 315, 316, 317, 318, 320
change cruise control functionality 318
fault tracing 317
function 306
managing speed 310, 311
overtaking 315
radar sensor 337
setting the time interval 312, 313
AdBlue 465
filling 466
operation 465
Symbols and messages 468
tank volume 661
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 235
Adjusting the steering wheel 194
Aerial
location 266
Airbag 50
Activating/deactivating 53
driver's side 50
passenger side 51, 53
Airbag, see Airbag 50
Air conditioning 225
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 661
Air conditioning system 198, 210
repair 598
Air distribution 204
Air vents 204, 205
change 204
defrosting 217
Recirculation 216
table of options 207
Air quality 201, 202
allergies and asthma 202
passenger compartment filter 203
Air recirculation 216
Alarm 277
deactivation 278
motion and tilt sensors 277
reduced alarm level 279
Alcohol lock 424, 425
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 202
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 441
Ambience lights 162
Android Auto 515, 517
Apple CarPlay 511, 512, 514
Approach lighting 159
Apps 493
Assistance at risk of collision 388, 389,
390, 391, 392, 393, 394, 396
Audio and media 492
Audio settings 492, 524
phone 525
play media 503, 504
Text message 524
Auto climate control 216
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
670
Auto hold 431
Automatic brake 431
activate and deactivate 432
after collision 433
Automatic car wash 635
Automatic car washes 635
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 446
Automatic gearbox 435
kickdown 439
oil 660
trailer 476
Automatic locking 270
Automatic relocking 241, 264
Automatic speed limiter 294, 296, 297
Auxiliary heater 235
AWD, All Wheel Drive 441
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 182, 183, 185,
186, 187, 188
rear seat, lowering 190
Bag holder 581
Battery 471, 611
jump starting 471
maintenance 611
overload 471
start 611
support 614
symbols on the battery 615
warning symbols 615
Bicycle rack
towbar mounted 479
BLIS 363, 364, 365
Bluetooth
connect 509
connect car to Internet 527
phone 517
settings 526
Bonnet, opening 597
Book service and repair 592
Brake assist
after collision 433
Brake fluid
grade 660
Brake functions 425
Brake light 158
Brakes 425
Anti-lock braking system, ABS 425
automatic when stationary 431
brake assist system, BAS 426
brake light 158
brake system 425
emergency brake lights 158
handbrake 428
maintenance 427
on gritted roads 427
on wet roads 427
Brake system
fluid 660
bulbs, specifications 610
bypass alcohol lock 424
C
Camera sensor 358
Camera unit 346
Car care 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638
Leather upholstery 631
Car functions
in centre display 118
Cargo area 579
electrical socket 574, 576
lighting 161
mounting points 581
protective net 586
Cargo cover 582, 583
Cargo grille 584
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
671
Car holiday 457
Car key battery low 245
Car modem
connect car to Internet 528
settings 529
Car status 592
Tyre pressure 555
Car upholstery 628, 630, 631, 632
Car washing 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638
Catalytic converter
Recovery 481
CD player 507
central locking 267
Centre display
change appearance 127
cleaning 628
climate control 210
function view 118
Keyboard 122
messages 136, 137, 138
operation 108, 111, 115, 120
overview 105
settings 128, 129, 130
switch off and change volume 127
symbols in status bar 120
views 111
Change of owner 130
Checking the engine oil level 601
Child safety 58
Child safety locks 269
Child seat 58, 59, 61, 63
integrated child seat 71
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 61
lower mounting points 60
positioning/fitting 61, 63
table for location 65
table of i-Size 67
table of ISOFIX 68
Upper mounting points 59
City Safety in crossing traffic 356, 357
City Safety with obstructed evasive
manoeuvre 357
City Safety 350, 351, 353, 354, 358, 361
Cleaning 630, 632
automatic car wash 635
car washing 633, 634, 635, 636, 637, 638
centre display 628
Fabric upholstery 628, 630, 631
rims 638
Seatbelts 630
upholstery 628, 630, 631, 632
Cleaning wheel rims 638
Cleaning wiper blades 636
Clean Zone 201
Clean Zone Interior Package 202
Climate control 198, 210
auto-regulation 216
centre display 210
experienced temperature 199
fan control 221, 222
Parking 226
rear seat 210
sensors 199
temperature control 223, 224
voice control 200
zones 198
Climate control system
Refrigerant 661
Clock, adjustment 89
CO2 emissions 663
Collision 42, 45, 50, 56
Collision warning 350, 362
Collision warning system
Pedestrian detection 354
Radar sensor 337
Colour code, paint 641
Colour codes 641
Combined instrument panel 79
settings 83
Compass 487, 488
calibration 488
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
672
Condensation in headlamps 634, 635,
636, 637
Connect car to Internet
no or poor connection 531
via a mobile device (WiFi) 528
via car modem 528
via mobile device (Bluetooth) 527
Connect phone 518
Controls lighting 162
Coolant 660
Coolant, filling 602
Cooling system
overheating 470
Cornering lights 157
Corner Traction Control 286
Cover
cargo area 583
Crash, see Collision 42
Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 368, 369, 370, 371
Cruise control 298, 299
deactivate 302
managing speed 299, 300
temporary deactivation 301
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 368, 369, 370, 371
Cyclist detection 354
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 202
D
Data
recording 35
transfer between car and workshop 590
Data link connector 38
Data sharing 532
Daytime running lights 151
Deadlock 280
deactivation 280
Defrosting 217
Diesel 462
run out of fuel 463
Diesel particle filter 464
Digital radio (DAB) 501
Dimensions 651
Towbar 473
dipped beam 152
Dipstick, electronic 601
Direction indicator 155
Direction indicators 155
direction of rotation 549
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 438
Display lighting 162
Distance Warning 303, 304
Limitations 305
DivX
®
508
Door mirrors 168, 169
Dipping 168
resetting 169
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy 28
Driver Alert Control 378
operation 379, 380
Driver display
application menu 99, 100
messages 101
Driver performance 87, 88
Driver profile 133
edit 135
select 134
driver support system 284
Drivetrain
Gearbox 433
Driving
cooling system 470
with a tailer 476
Driving economy 456
Driving in water 458
Driving mode 441
change 443
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
673
Driving with a trailer
towball load 654
towing capacity 654
E
ECO climate 444
ECO mode 444
activate with function button 446
Economical driving 444, 456
ECO pressure 551, 667
Electrical socket 574
using 576
Electrical system 611
Electric parking brake 428
emergency brake lights 158
Emergency equipment
first aid kit 587
warning triangle 587
Emergency puncture repair kit 566
implementation, follow-up inspection 566
location 565
overview 565
Pump up tyre 569
sealing fluid 565
Emissions of carbon dioxide 663
Engine
deactivate 421
overheating 470
start 420
Start/Stop 446
Engine braking, automatic 454
Engine compartment
coolant 602
Engine oil 600
overview 599
Engine drag control 286
Engine oil 600, 659
adverse driving conditions 659
filling 601
filter 600
grade and volume 657
Engine specifications 656
Engine temperature
high 470
Environment 28
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 320
see Messages and symbols 320, 336
Error messages in BLIS 367
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume 461
Exhaust system 465
External dimensions 651
F
Fan
Air distribution 204
Air vents 205
Control 221, 222
Fault tracing for the camera sensor 347
Ferry transport 451
First aid 587
First aid kit 587
Flooded road 458
Fluids, capacities 644, 661
Fluids and oils 660, 661
Fog lamp
front 156
rear 157
Foot brake 425
Four-C 451
Front seat
Climate control 210
Fan 221
heating 212, 213
Temperature 223
Ventilation 214
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
674
Front seat, manual 182
Front seat, power 183
adjusting seat 183
adjusting the passenger seat from the
driver's seat 189
Lumbar support 188
massage 185, 186, 187
memory function 184, 185
multi-function control 185, 186, 187, 188
Side supports 187
FSC, ecolabelling 23
Fuel 460, 461, 462
fuel consumption 663
identifier 461, 462
fuel gauge 84
Fuelling
filling 459
fuel filler flap 459
Fuel tank
volume 661
Fuel vapour 460
Fuse box 616
Fuses
changing 617
General 616
in cargo area 624
in engine compartment 618
under glovebox 621
G
Gearbox 433
automatic 435
manual 434
Gear positions
automatic gearbox 435
Gear selector inhibitor 438
deactivate 438
Gear shift indicator 439
Glass
laminated/reinforced 164
Glovebox 577
Gracenote® 506
Gross vehicle weight 653
GSI - Gear selector assistance 439
H
Handbrake 428
Handwash 634
Hard disk
space 534
Hazard warning flashers 158
HDC 454
Headlamp beam
height adjustment 150
Headlamp control 148, 162
Headlamp levelling of headlamps 150
head restraint 192
Head up display
activate and deactivate 140
cleaning 629
settings 140
windscreen replacement 599
Head-up display 138
Heated washer nozzles 176
Heater 233
auxiliary heater 235
parking heater 234
Heating
seats 212, 213
steering wheel 215
Windows 219, 220
High engine temperature 470
High-pressure washing 636
Hill descent control 454
activate with function button 455
Hill Descent Control 454, 455
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 432
Hill Start Assist 432
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
675
HomeLink® 484
program 484
using 486
Home safe light duration 159
Horn 193
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 202
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 56
ID, Volvo 26
Identification number 39
Ignition position 422, 423
Immobiliser 252
Immobilizer
Immobiliser 252
Indicator symbols 90
Individual drive mode 441
Inflatable curtain 56
Inflatable Curtain 56
Information display 79, 83
Infotainment system (Audio and media) 492
Instrument lighting 162
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car 76
right-hand drive car 77
Instruments and controls 76, 77
Integrated child seat 71
lowering 73
raising 72
IntelliSafe
Driver support 31
Interior Air Quality System 202
Interior lighting 160, 162
Interior rearview mirror 168
Dipping 168
Intermittent wiping 175
Internet, see Internet-connected car 526
Internet-connected car
book service and repair 592
send car information 594
system updates 591
iPod®, connection 509
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System 552
J
Jack 557
Journey statistics 87
Jump starting 471
K
Kerb weight 653
Key 239
Keyboard 122, 125
change language 125
Keyless
Locking/unlocking 264
settings 265
touch-sensitive surfaces 263
Keypad in the steering wheel 193
Key tag 239
L
Labels
location of 648
Laminated glass 164
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
676
Lamps
change 604
location 605
specifications 610
trailer 478
Lane assistance
operation 383
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA) 380, 382, 383, 385, 387
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 380, 382, 383,
385, 387
Language 128
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 631
Level control 451
settings 453
License agreement 93, 535
Lifting tool 557
Lighting
active bending lights 156
approach lighting 159
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment 160
Automatic main beam 153
brake light 158
bulbs, specifications 610
controls 148, 160, 162
controls lighting 162
cornering lights 157
daytime running lights 151
dipped beam 152
direction indicators 155
display lighting 162
emergency brake lights 158
fog lamp 156
Hazard warning flashers 158
headlamp levelling 150
home safe lighting 159
instrument lighting 162
in the passenger compartment 160, 162
lamp positions 605
main beam 153
position lamps 151
rear fog lamp 157
settings 149
Lighting, bulb replacement 604
daytime running lights/position lamps
front 607
dipped beam 606
direction indicators front 608
main beam 607
rear fog lamp 610
remove plastic cover 605
Reversing lamp 609
Limitations for Driver Alert Control 380
Limp home 433
Load carriers 580
Loading
General 579
load retaining eyelets 581
long load 580
Loading hooks 581
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area 581
Lock
locking 241
unlocking 241
Lockable wheel bolts 558
Lock confirmation 238
setting 239
Locking/unlocking
tailgate 243, 265
Low battery voltage
Battery 471
Low speed control 453
activate with function button 454
M
Main beam 153
Maintained climate comfort 231
start/shut-off 231
maintenance
Rustproofing 638
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
677
Manual gearbox 434
oil 660
Max. roof load 653
Media player 502, 503, 504
compatible file formats 533, 534
voice control 144
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 320
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 361
Messages in BLIS 367
Messages in displays 101, 136
manage 102, 137
saved 103, 138
Meters
fuel gauge 84
Mileage 84
Misting
condensation in headlamps 633, 635
Mobile phone, see Phone 518
Mood lighting 161
Motion sensor 277
N
Net
cargo area 586
O
octane rating 461
Oil, see also Engine oil 657, 659
Oil level low 601
Online car 526
no or poor connection 531
Option/accessory 21
Output 656
outside temperature gauge 89
Overheating 470, 476
Overtaking Assistance 315, 332, 333
Owner's manual 21
ecolabelling 23
in centre display 17, 18
in mobile 20
Owner information 16
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 53
Paddle on the steering wheel 193
Paintwork
colour code 641
damage and touch-up 639, 641
Panorama roof
opening and closing 172
pinch protection 164
sun blind 171, 174
ventilation position 173
PAP - Active Park Assist 411, 412, 415,
416, 417, 418
Park Assist 397, 398, 399, 400, 401
function 397, 398, 399
Park assist camera 402, 403, 405, 407,
408, 409, 410
settings 407
Park assist camera's limitations 408
Park assist lines for Park assist camera 405
Parking
on hill 430
Parking brake 428
activate and deactivate 428
automatic activation 430
low battery voltage 430
Parking climate 226
Symbols and messages 232
Parking heater 234
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 53
Passenger compartment filter 203
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater) 234
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
678
Passenger compartment interior 572
electrical socket 574
glovebox 577
Sun visor 579
tunnel console 573
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic 160
Pedestrian Protection System 44
Personal information (Privacy policy) 36
petrol 461
Petrol particle filter 462
Phone 517
Calls 522, 524
change to another 521
connect 518
connect automatically 520
connect manually 520
disconnect 521
remove 522
text message 523
voice control 143
Pilot Assist 322, 325, 326, 327, 328,
329, 330, 332, 333, 334, 336
overtaking 332, 333
Pinch protection 164
resetting 165
PIN code 529
Pocket park assist - PAP 411, 412, 415,
416, 417, 418
Polishing 633
Position lamp 151
Power operated tailgate 270
Power panorama roof 171
Power save mode 471
Power seat 183
Power windows 165, 166
pinch protection 164
PPS (Pedestrian Protection System) 44
Preconditioning 226
start/shut-off 227
Timer 228
Privacy policy 36
Private locking 275
Activating/deactivating 275
Protective grille 584
Protective net 586
Pump up tyre 569
Puncture 565
R
Radar sensor 309, 337
Limitations 338
Radar unit 337
Radio 496
change radio frequency and radio sta-
tion 497
DAB 501
search for radio station 498
settings 499
start 497
voice control 144
Radio favourites 499
Rain sensor 176, 177
Rain sensor memory function 177
Raising the car 595
Rear door
sun blind 167
Rear seat
Climate control 210
Fan 222
head restraint 192
heating 213
lowering the backrest 190
Temperature 223
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
679
Rearview and door mirrors
compass 487, 488
Dipping 168
door 168, 169
electrically retractable 169
heating 220
interior 168
rear window
heating 220
Washers 179, 180
Wiper 179, 180
Recommendations during driving 457
Recommendations for loading 579
Recovery 483
Red Key 248
settings 249
Refrigerant 598
climate control system 661
Refuelling 459, 466
AdBlue 466
Regeneration 462, 464
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable 484
Remote control immobiliser 252
Remote control key 239
battery replacement 245
connect to driver profile 135
detachable key blade 250
loss 248
range 244
Remote control key system, type approval 254
Remote updates 591
Resetting, trip meter 87
Resetting the door mirrors 169
Restore settings 131
change of owner 130
Driver profile 135
Retractable power door mirrors 169
Reversing camera 402, 403, 405, 407,
408, 409, 410
Reversing sensors 397, 398, 399, 400, 401
Road run-off protection 389, 390
Road sign information 372, 373, 375
Limitations 377
operation 373, 375, 376, 377
Roll Stability Control 285
Roof load, max. weight 653
RSC (Roll Stability Control) 285
Run out of fuel
diesel 463
Rustproofing 638
S
Safety 42
pregnancy 42
Safety mode 56
start/movement 57
Sealing fluid 565
Seat, see Seats 182
Seatbelt 45
buckle/unbuckle 46
pregnancy 42
seatbelt reminder 48
seatbelt tensioner 47
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 45
Seatbelt reminder 48
seatbelt tensioner
Resetting 48
Seatbelt tensioner 47
Seats
heating 212, 213
manual front seat 182
memory function front seat 184, 185
power front seat 183
Ventilation 214
whiplash protection 43
sensors
Air quality 203
Climate control 199
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
680
Sensus
connection and entertainment 32
Sensus Navigation 375
Service position 643
Service programme 590
Set time interval 304
Settings 131
Categories 132
contextual 129
Resetting 131
settings menu 131
Side airbag 55
Side Impact Protection System 55, 56
SIM card 529
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 55, 56
Skidding 457, 458
Ski hatch 582
slippery driving conditions 458
Software updates 35
Soot filter 464
spare wheel 562, 563
Speed camera 377
Speed limiter 290, 293, 294, 297
deactivation 293
getting started 291
temporary deactivation 292
Speed ratings, tyres 547
Spin control 286
Stabiliser
trailer 477
Stability and traction control system 286, 289
operation 287, 288
Stability system 286
Stains 628, 630, 631, 632
Start/Stop 446
deactivate 448
Driving 446
Limitations 448
Starting the engine 420
after collision 57
Start the car 420
Steering assistance at risk of colli-
sion 388, 389, 390, 391, 392, 393, 394, 396
Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli-
sion 391, 392
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col-
lision 393, 394
Steering force, speed related 284
Steering force level, see Steering force 284
Steering lock 194
Steering wheel 193, 194
heating 215
keypad 193
paddle 193
steering wheel adjustment 194
Steering wheel paddles 436
Stickers
location of 648
Stone chips and scratches 639, 641
Stop/start function 446
Storage spaces 572
glovebox 577
Sun visor 579
tunnel console 573
Sun blind
panorama roof 171, 174
pinch protection 164
Rear door 167
Sunroof
pinch protection 164
Sun visor 579
mirror lighting 161
Support battery 614
Switching off the engine 421
Switch off engine 421
Symbols
indicator symbols 90
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
681
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 320
centre display status field 120
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 361
parking climate 232
Symbols and messages for Assistance at
risk of collision 396
system updates 591
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking 243, 265
opening/closing with foot movement 274
power 270
unlock from inside 268
Temperature
Control 223, 224
experienced 199
Temporary spare
spare wheel 562
Terms and conditions
services 36
user 532
Through-load hatch 582
Tilt detector 277
Tools 557
Total airing function 239, 267
Towbar 472
foldable 474
specifications 473
Towing 480, 483
Towing capacity and towball load 654
Towing eye 481
Traction control 286
Traffic information 499
Trailer 477
cable 476
driving with a trailer 476
Lamps 478
snaking 477
Trailer stability assist 286, 477
Transmission 433
Transmission oil
grade 660
Tread 549
Tread depth 549, 563
Tread wear indicators 549
Trip computer 84, 86
Trip meter 84
Trip meter, resetting 87
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 317
TSA - trailer stability assist 477
TSA - Trailer stability assist 286
Tunnel console 573
Tunnel detection 152
TV 510
settings 511
watch 510
Type approval
radar system 342
remote control key system 254
Type designations 648
Tyre dimension 547, 557
Tyre load index 547
Tyre pressure
Adjust 550
Check 550
recommended 551
Tyre pressure label 551
Tyre pressure monitoring 552
action 556
Calibrate 553
Status 555
Tyre pressure table 667
Tyres 546
dimensions 665
direction of rotation 549
installation 561
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
682
pressure 667
puncture repair 565
removal 559
rotation 546
specifications 665, 666, 667
storage 546
tread depth 563
tread wear indicators 549
tyre pressure monitoring 552
tyre pressure table 667
winter tyres 563
U
Units 128
Unknown car part 281
Unlocking
settings 243
with key blade 251
USB
jack for connecting media 509
V
Ventilation 204, 205
seats 214
Vibration damper 472
Video 507, 509
settings 508
Voice control
Climate control 200
phone 143
radio and media 144
settings 144
Voice recognition 141
VOL marking 546
Volvo ID 26
create and register 26
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control 309
stability and traction control system 286
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS 92
alternator not charging 92
Fault in brake system 92
Low oil pressure 92
Parking brake applied 92
seatbelt reminder 92
starter battery not charging 92
Warning 92
Warning sound
Parking brake 430
Warning symbols 92
Safety 42
Warning triangle 587
Washer fluid 644
Washer nozzles, heated 176
Washers
Headlamps 178
rear window 179, 180
washer fluid, filling 644
windscreen 178
Waxing 633
Weights
kerb weight 653
Wheel bolts 558
lockable 558
Wheel change 557
Wheel rim, dimensions 548
Wheel rims
cleaning 638
Wheels
installation 561
removal 559
snow chains 564
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 665
tyre load index and speed rating 547, 666
whiplash protection 43
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
683
Whiplash Protection System 43
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 43
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet 528
delete network 531
share internet connection, hotspot 530
technology and security 532
Window
sun blind 167
Windows and glass 164
Windscreen
heating 219
projected image 138, 140
Windscreen washing 178
Windscreen wiper 175
rain sensor 176, 177
Winter driving 457
Winter tyres 563
Winter wheels 563
Wiper blades
changing 641, 642
Service position 643
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
684
TP 25216 (English), AT 1746, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation
12


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Volvo V90 Cross Country 2018 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Volvo V90 Cross Country 2018 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 12,97 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Volvo V90 Cross Country 2018

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2018 User Manual - German - 730 pages

Volvo V90 Cross Country 2018 User Manual - Dutch - 712 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info